Professional Documents
Culture Documents
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
requirements.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information 12 General information on seatbelts 28 Two-stage booster seat* - raising 52
Digital owner's manual in the car 13 Seatbelt - putting on 29 Two-stage booster seat* - lowering 53
Volvo Cars support site 15 Seatbelt - loosening 30 Child seat - ISOFIX 54
Reading the owner's manual 16 Seatbelt - pregnancy 30 ISOFIX - size classes 55
Recording data 19 Seatbelt reminder 31 ISOFIX - types of child seat 56
Accessories and extra equipment 20 Seatbelt tensioner 31 Child seats - upper mounting points 58
Volvo ID 21 Safety - warning symbol 32
Environmental philosophy 22 Airbag system 33
The owner's manual and the environment 25 Driver airbag 34
Laminated glass 25 Passenger airbag 34
Bi-Fuel* - introduction to vehicle gas 25 Passenger airbag - activating/deac- 36
tivating*
Side airbag (SIPS) 38
Inflatable Curtain (IC) 39
General information on WHIPS 39
(whiplash protection)
WHIPS - seating position 40
Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) 41
General information on safety mode 42
Safety mode - attempting to start the car 43
Safety mode - moving the car 43
General information on child safety 44
Child seats 45
Child seats - location 50
Child seat - two-stage booster seat* 51
2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand 60 Seats, rear 85 Compass* 109
drive car - overview
Steering wheel 88 Sunroof* 110
Instruments and controls, right-hand 63
drive car - overview Heating* of the steering wheel 89 Menu navigation - combined instru- 112
ment panel
Combined instrument panel 66 Light switches 90
Menu overview - combined instru- 113
Analogue combined instrument 66 Position lamps 92 ment panel
panel - overview Daytime running lights 92 Messages 114
Digital combined instrument panel - 67 Tunnel detection* 93
overview Messages - handling 115
Main/dipped beam 93 MY CAR 115
Eco guide & Power guide* 70
Active main beam* 94 Trip computer 116
Combined instrument panel - mean- 71
ing of indicator symbols Active Xenon headlamps* 97 Trip computer - analogue combined 118
Combined instrument cluster - 73 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern 98 instrument panel
meaning of warning symbols Trip computer - digital combined 121
Rear fog lamp 98
Outside temperature gauge 75 instrument panel
Brake lights 99
Trip meter 75 Trip computer - trip statistics* 124
Hazard warning flashers 99
Clock 76 direction indicators 100
Fuel gauge for vehicle gas* 76 Interior lighting 100
Combined instrument panel - license 77
agreement Home safe lighting 102
Symbols in the display Approach lighting 102
77
Volvo Sensus Wipers and washers 102
80
Key positions Power windows 105
81
Key positions - functions at different Door mirrors 106
82
levels Windows and rearview and door mir- 108
Seats, front rors - heating
83
Seats, front - electrically operated* Rearview mirror - interior 108
84
3
CLIMATE CONTROL LOADING AND STORAGE
General information on climate control 126 Engine block heater and passenger 141 Storage spaces 150
compartment heater* - direct start
Actual temperature 127 Tunnel console 152
Engine block heater and passenger 142
Sensors - climate control 127 compartment heater* - immediate stop Tunnel console - cigarette lighter 152
and ashtray*
Air quality 127 Engine block heater and passenger 142 Glovebox
Air quality - passenger compartment filter 128 compartment heater* - timer 152
Engine block heater and passenger Inlaid mats* 153
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior 128 144
Package (CZIP)* compartment heater* - messages Vanity mirror 153
Air quality - IAQS* 128 Additional heater* 146 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets 153
Air quality - material 129 Fuel-driven additional heater* 146 Loading 154
Menu settings - climate control 129 Electric additional heater* 147 Loading - long load 155
Air distribution in the passenger 129 Roof load 156
compartment
Load retaining eyelets 156
Electronic climate control - ECC 132
Loading - bag holder* 156
Heated front seats* 133
12 V electrical socket - cargo area* 157
Heated rear seat* 134
Safety net* 157
Fan 134
Safety grille* 159
Auto-regulation 135
Cargo cover* 159
Temperature control in the passen- 135
ger compartment
Air conditioning 136
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen 136
Air distribution - recirculation 137
Air distribution - table 138
Engine block heater and passenger 140
compartment heater*
4
LOCKS AND ALARM DRIVER SUPPORT
Remote control key 162 Keyless Drive* - locking 175 Active chassis - Four C* 190
Remote control key - losing 162 Keyless drive* - unlocking 176 Adjustable steering force* 190
Remote control key - personalisation* 163 Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the 176 Electronic stability control (ESC) - 191
key blade general
Locking/unlocking - indicator 164
Keyless Drive* - lock settings 177 Electronic stability control (ESC) - 192
Lock indicator 164 operation
Immobiliser Keyless Drive* - antenna location 177
165 Electronic stability control (ESC) - 193
Remote-controlled immobiliser with Locking/unlocking - from the outside 178 symbols and messages
165
tracking system* Manual locking of the door 178 Speed limiter* 195
Remote control key - functions 166 Locking/unlocking - from the inside 179 Speed limiter* - getting started 195
Remote control key - range 167 Global opening 180 Speed limiter* - changing speed 196
Remote control key with PCC* - 167 Locking/unlocking - glovebox 181
unique functions Speed limiter* - temporary deactiva- 196
Locking/unlocking - tailgate 181 tion and standby mode
Remote control key with PCC* - range 168
Deadlocks* 183 Speed limiter* - alarm for speed 197
Detachable key blade 169 exceeded
Child safety locks - manual activation 184
Detachable key blade - detaching/ 169 Speed limiter* - deactivation 197
attaching Child safety locks - electrical activation* 184
Cruise control* 198
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 170 Alarm* 185
Cruise control* - managing speed 199
Privacy locking* 171 Alarm indicator* 186
Cruise control* temporary deactiva- 199
Remote control key - replacing the 172 Alarm* - automatic re-arming 186 tion and standby mode
battery Alarm* - remote control key not working 187 Cruise control* - resume set speed 200
Keyless drive* 173 Alarm signals* 187 Cruise control* - deactivate 200
Keyless Drive* - remote control key 174 Reduced alarm level*
range 187 Distance Warning* 201
Type approval - remote control key 188 Distance Warning* - limitations 202
Keyless drive* - secure handling of 174 system
the remote control key Distance Warning* - symbols and 203
Keyless Drive* - interference to 175 messages
remote control key function
5
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* 204 City Safety™ - laser sensor 226 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* 252
Adaptive cruise control* - function 205 City Safety™ - symbols and messages 228 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - 253
function
Adaptive cruise control* - overview 206 Collision warning system* 229
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - 254
Adaptive cruise control* - managing 207 Collision warning system* - function 230 operation
speed
Collision warning system* - detection 231 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - 254
Adaptive cruise control* - set time 209 of cyclists limitations
interval
Collision warning system* - detection 232 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - 255
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary 209 of pedestrians symbols and messages
deactivation, and standby mode
Collision warning system* - operation 233 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* 256
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking 210
another vehicle Collision warning system* - limitations 235 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function 257
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate 211 Collision warning system* - camera 236 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation 258
sensor limitations
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue 211 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations 259
assistance Collision warning system* - symbols 238
and messages Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols 260
Adaptive cruise control* - switch 213 and messages
cruise control functionality BLIS* 240
Park Assist* 261
Adaptive cruise control* - fault trac- 214 BLIS* - operation 241
Park assist syst* - function 261
ing and action CTA* 242
Park assist syst* - backward 262
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols 215 BLIS - symbols and messages 244
and messages Park assist syst* - forward 263
Road Sign Information (RSI)* 244
Radar sensor 217 Park assist syst* - fault indication 264
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 245
Radar sensor - limitations 217 Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors 264
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 248
Type approval - radar system 219 Park assist camera* 265
Driver Alert System* 248
City Safety™ 222 Park assist camera - settings 267
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* 249
City Safety™ - function 223 Park assist camera - limitations 268
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation 249
City Safety™ - operation 223 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 268
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols 251
City Safety™ - limitations 224 and messages Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function 269
6
STARTING AND DRIVING
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation 270 Starting the engine 276 Drive mode ECO* 298
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations 272 Switching off the engine 277 Foot brake 300
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols 273 Steering lock 277 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system 301
and messages
Remote start (ERS)* 277 Foot brake - emergency brake lights 302
and automatic hazard warning flashers
Remote start (ERS) - operation 278
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance 302
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and 279
messages Parking brake 303
Jump starting with another battery 281 Driving in water 307
Gearboxes 282 Overheating 307
Manual gearbox 282 Driving with open tailgate/boot lid 308
Gear shift indicator* 283 Overload - starter battery 308
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* 284 Before a long journey 309
Gear selector inhibitor 287 Winter driving 309
Hill start assist (HSA)* 288 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing 310
All-wheel drive - (AWD)* 288 Fuel filler flap - manual opening 310
Hill Descent Control (HDC)* 289 Filling up with fuel 310
Start/Stop* 290 Fuel - handling 311
Start/Stop* - function and operation 291 Fuel - petrol 312
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop 292 Fuel - diesel 313
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts 293 Diesel particle filter (DPF) 314
Start/Stop* - the engine does not 294 Filling vehicle gas* 315
auto-start Switch for gas operation* 316
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual 295 Catalytic converters 317
gearbox
Economical driving 317
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages 296
7
WHEELS AND TYRES
Driving with a trailer* 318 Tyres - maintenance 332 Tyre pressure monitoring system 350
(TPMS)* - activate/deactivate
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox 320 Tyres - direction of rotation 333
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - 350
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox 320 Tyres - tread wear indicators 334 recommendations
Towing bracket/Towbar* 321 Tyres - air pressure 334 Tyre pressure monitoring system 351
Detachable towbar* - storage 321 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions 336 (TPMS)* - rectifying low tyre pressure
Detachable towbar* - specifications 322 Tyres - dimensions 336 Tyre pressure monitoring system 352
(TPMS)* - driveable punctured tyres*
Detachable towbar* - attachment/ 323 Tyres - load index 337
removal Type approval - tyre pressure moni- 353
Tyres - speed ratings 337 toring system (TPMS)*
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA 325 Wheel bolts 338 Emergency puncture repair 359
Towing 326 Winter tyres 338 Emergency puncture repair kit - location 359
Towing eye 327 Changing wheels - removing wheels 339 Emergency puncture repair kit - overview 360
Recovery 329 Changing wheels - fitting 342 Emergency puncture repair - operation 361
Warning triangle 343 Emergency puncture repair - rechecking 363
Tools 344 Emergency puncture repair kit - 364
Jack* 344 inflating the tyres
First aid kit* 345
Tyre pressure monitoring* 346
Tyre monitoring (TM)* 346
Tyre pressure monitoring system 348
(TPMS)* - general information
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - 349
adjust (recalibration)
Tyre pressure monitoring system 349
(TPMS)* - tyre status
8
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme 366 Lamp replacement - location of rear 385 Rustproofing 414
lamps
Book service and repair* 366 Cleaning the interior 414
Lamp replacement - number plate 386
Inspection and service of the system 368 lighting Paint damage 416
for vehicle gas*
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo 386
Raising the car 369 area
Bonnet - opening and closing 371 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting 386
Engine compartment - overview 371 Lamps - specifications 387
Engine compartment - checking 372 Wiper blades 388
Engine oil - general 373 Washer fluid - filling 390
Engine oil - checking and filling 374 Starter battery - general 391
Coolant - level 376 Battery - symbols 392
Brake and clutch fluid - level 377 Starter battery - replacement 393
Power steering fluid - level 378 Battery - Start/Stop 395
Climate control system - fault tracing 379 Electrical system 397
and repair
Fuses - general 398
Lamp replacement - general 379
Fuses - in engine compartment 399
Lamp replacement - headlamps 381
Fuses - under glovebox 403
Lamp replacement - cover for main/ 382
dipped beam bulbs Fuses - in the control module under 405
the glovebox
Lamp replacement - dipped beam 382
Fuses - in cargo area 407
Lamp replacement - main beam 383
Fuses - in the engine compartment's 409
Lamp replacement - extra main beam 384 cold zone
Lamp replacement - direction indica- 384 Car wash 411
tors front
Polishing and waxing 413
Lamp replacement - rear lamp 385
Water and dirt-repellent coating 413
9
SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations 420 Alphabetical Index 449
Dimensions 423
Weights 424
Towing capacity and towball load 425
Engine specifications 427
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions 429
Engine oil - grade and volume 430
Coolant - grade and volume 432
Transmission fluid - grade and volume 433
Brake fluid - grade and volume 434
Power steering fluid - grade 434
Fuel tank - volume 435
Specifications for air conditioning 436
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 438
Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions 442
Load index and speed rating 444
Tyres - approved tyre pressures 446
10
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's The car's screen1 Volvo Cars support site
information A digital version of the owner's Go to support.volvocars.com
Owner's information is available in several differ- manual is available in the car's and select your country. Here
ent product formats, both digital and printed. screen. Press the MY CAR but- you can find owner's manuals,
The owner's manual is available in the car's ton in the centre console, press both online and in PDF format.
screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars OK/MENU and select On the Volvo Cars support site
support site. There is a Quick Guide and a sup- Owner's manual. The infor- there are also video tutorials
plement to the owner's manual available in the mation is searchable and can and further information and
glovebox, with specifications and fuse informa- also be subdivided into categories. help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
tion, amongst other things. A printed owner's ship. The page is available for most markets.
Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the
manual can be ordered. Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.
car.
Printed information
Mobile app There is a supplement to the
In App Store or Google Play,
owner's manual2 in the glove-
search for "Volvo Manual",
box that contains information
download the app to your
on fuses and specifications, as
smartphone or tablet and select
well as a summary of important
the car.
and practical information.
The app contains video tutorials
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
as well as options for visual navigation with exte-
format that helps you to get started with the most
rior and interior images of the car. It is easy to
commonly used functions in the car.
navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable. Depending on equipment level selected, market,
Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devi- etc. additional owner's information may also be
ces. available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order. See how the owner's manual is structured
in Reading the owner's manual.
1A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
2A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
12
INTRODUCTION
Changing the language in the car's Digital owner's manual in the car • Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
screen The owner's manual can be read on the screen bookmarked articles.
Changing the language in the car's display may in the car3. The content is searchable and it is • Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
mean that some information does not correspond easy to navigate between different sections. common functions.
to national or local laws and regulations. Don't
Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY Select the information symbol in the lower right-
change to a language that's difficult to under-
CAR button in the centre console, press OK/ hand corner in order to obtain information about
stand, it may then be difficult to find your way
MENU and select Owner's manual. the digital owner's manual.
back in the structure on the screen.
For basic navigation, see Operating the system.
NOTE
IMPORTANT See below for a more detailed description.
The digital owner's manual is not available
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
while driving.
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and Search
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
mendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the screen and the printed
information then it is always the printed infor-
mation that applies.
13
INTRODUCTION
|| Use the character wheel to enter a search term, a|A Changes between lowercase and When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
e.g. "seatbelt". uppercase letters with OK/MENU. characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and
9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor
||}
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/
Changes from the character wheel through these characters.
MENU to confirm. The number and letter
to the search field. Move the cur-
buttons on the control panel in the centre
sor with TUNE. Delete any mis- • Stop with the cursor on the desired character
console can also be used. in order to select it - the character is shown
spelling with EXIT. To return to the
2. Continue with the next letter and so on. character wheel, press OK/MENU. on the enter line.
3. To change the input mode to numbers or Note that the digit and letter but-
• Delete/undo using EXIT.
special characters, or to perform a search, tons on the control panel can be To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
turn TUNE to one of the options (see explan- used for editing in the search field. number key.
ation in the following table) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/ Categories
Enter with the numerical keyboard The articles in the owner's manual are structured
MENU.
into main categories and subcategories. The
same article can be in several appropriate cate-
123/AB Change between letters and num- gories in order to be found more easily.
C bers with OK/MENU.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and
MORE Change to special characters with press OK/MENU to open a category - selected
OK/MENU. - or article - selected . Press EXIT to go
OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE to back to the previous view.
select a search result article, press
OK/MENU to go to the article.
Favourites
Located here are the articles that are saved as
favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see
the heading "Navigating in an article" below.
Numerical keyboard.
Another way of entering characters is to use the Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.
to go back to the previous view.
14
INTRODUCTION
Quick Guide ated symbol is shown here as well as the Volvo Cars support site
Located here is a selection of articles for getting number of such texts in the article. There is additional information regarding your
to know the car's most common functions. The Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or car on the Volvo Cars website and support
articles can also be accessed via categories, but scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled page. From the website, it is also possible to
are collected here for quick access. to the start/end of an article the home and navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and favourite options are accessed by scrolling a fur- page for you and your car.
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT ther step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate
the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go Support on the Internet
to go back to the previous view.
back to the previous view. Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code
Navigating in an article below to visit the page. The support page is avail-
able for most markets.
}}
ings, important or note texts then an associ-
* Option/accessory. 15
INTRODUCTION
|| Downloadable information from the Volvo Web there is also information about acces- Reading the owner's manual
support page sories and software adapted for your car model. A good way of getting to know your new car is
Maps to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
Related information
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there first journey.
• Volvo ID (p. 21)
is the facility to download maps from the support Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
page. become familiar with new functions, get advice
Apps on how best to handle the car in different situa-
For selected Volvo models from model year 2014 tions and learn how to make the best use of all
and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the the car's features. Please pay attention to the
form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
be accessed from here. ual.
Owner's manuals from previous model years Development work is constantly in progress to
Owner's manuals from previous model years are improve our product. Modifications may mean
available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide that information, descriptions and illustrations in
and supplement can also be accessed from the the owner's manual differ from the equipment in
support page. Select car model and model year in the car. We reserve the right to make modifica-
order to download the publication required. tions without prior notice.
16 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Owner's Manual in mobile devices The equipment described in the owner's manual Message texts
is not available in all cars - they have different In the car there are displays that show menu
equipment depending on adaptations for the texts and message texts. In the owner's manual
needs of different markets and national or local the appearance of these texts differs from the
laws and regulations. normal text. Examples of menu texts and mes-
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard sage texts: Media, Sending location.
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Decals
Special texts The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
WARNING have the following descending degree of impor-
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of tance for the warning/information.
injury.
Warning for personal injury
NOTE
IMPORTANT
The Owner's manual is available for download
as a mobile application (applies for certain car "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
models and mobile devices), see damage.
www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video NOTE
and searchable content and easy navigation NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
between different sections. the use of e.g. features and functions.
Options/accessories Footnote
All types of option/accessory are marked with an There is footnote information in the owner's man-
asterisk*. ual that is located at the bottom of the page. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
G031590
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted table then letters are used instead of numbers
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
extra equipment). for referral.
cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
}}
* Option/accessory. 17
INTRODUCTION
G031593
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of no
G031592
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
18
INTRODUCTION
19
INTRODUCTION
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described Accessories and extra equipment
information being disclosed to third parties with- The incorrect connection and installation of
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with accessories and extra equipment can negatively
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be affect the car's electronic system.
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a Certain accessories only function when associ-
legal right to access such. Special technical ated software is installed in the car's computer
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have system. Volvo therefore recommends that you
entered into agreements with Volvo have access always contact an authorised Volvo workshop
to is required to be able to read and interpret the before installing accessories or extra equipment
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- which are connected to or affect the electrical
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- system.
icing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a Areas where IR film is not applied.
secure manner and that the handling complies Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflect- A is the distance from the top edge of the wind-
with applicable legal requirements. For further
ing film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation screen down to the start of the field. B is the dis-
information - contact a Volvo dealer.
into the passenger compartment. tance from the top edge of the windscreen down
to the end of the field.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as
a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-
reflecting film may affect its function and per- Dimensions
formance. A 40 mm
For the optimal function of electronic equipment,
B 80 mm
it should be positioned on the part of the wind-
screen with no heat-reflecting film (see the high-
lighted area in the illustration).
20 * Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal
e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in
the e-mail message that is automatically sent to
the specified address in order to complete the
6 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
* Option/accessory. 21
INTRODUCTION
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption
ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
the car and takes into account the environmental Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
product developed must have less impact on the sumption in each of their respective classes.
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
environment than the product it replaces. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
resulted in the development of the more efficient that environmental laws and regulations in force
and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.
22
INTRODUCTION
Contributing to a better environment shop in the event of uncertainty about how this IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only type of waste should be discarded - an author- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ised Volvo workshop is recommended. allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
ment, but also means reduced costs for the Following this advice can save money, the plan- with the remote control key.
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to et's resources are saved, and the car's durability
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save Interior
is extended. For more information and further The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
money and contribute to a better environment - advice see Eco guide (p. 70), Economical driv-
here is some advice: carefully selected and has been tested in order to
ing (p. 317) and Fuel consumption (p. 438). be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
• Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
consumption. "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom-
passes a clean interior environment as well as substances that cause discomfort in the event of
• Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's highly efficient emission control. In many cases e.g. high heat and bright light.
recommended intervals for service and main- the exhaust emissions are well below the applica-
tenance of the car. Volvo workshops and the environment
ble standards. Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
long service life and low fuel consumption for
engine when stationary for longer periods. Clean air in the passenger
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
Pay attention to local regulations. compartment
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
• Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops are entrusted with the service and maintenance
and uneven speed contribute to increased and pollen from entering the passenger compart-
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
fuel consumption. ment via the air intake.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
• If the car is equipped with an engine block The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures which workshop premises shall be designed in
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the order to prevent spills and discharges into the
improves starting capacity and reduces wear traffic outside. environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
in cold weather and the engine reaches nor- edge and the tools required to guarantee good
The system cleans the air in the passenger com-
mal operating temperature more quickly, environmental care.
partment from contaminants such as particles,
which lowers consumption and reduces hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level Recycling
emissions. ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
Also remember to always dispose of environmen- air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. is also important that the car is recycled in an
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work- queues and tunnels for example.
}}
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
* Option/accessory. 23
INTRODUCTION
Related information
• The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
24
INTRODUCTION
The owner's manual and the Laminated glass Bi-Fuel* - introduction to vehicle
environment gas
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual The glass is reinforced which provides Cars with Bi-Fuel engines can be driven on
better protection against break-ins and
comes from Forest Stewardship Council® certi- either vehicle gas or petrol. Vehicle gas can be
improved sound insulation in the pas- biogas or natural gas. Vehicle gas is also called
fied forests or other controlled sources.
senger compartment. The windscreen CNG (Compressed Natural Gas).
The FSC® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a and other windows* have laminated glass.
printed owner's manual comes from FSC® certi- Methane is the main component in vehicle gas. In
fied forests or other controlled sources. natural gas, the methane content varies between
85% and 98%. In biogas, the content is almost
100%.
The tanks for vehicle gas are mounted under the
floor in the cargo area and do not affect the nor-
mal petrol tank.
The system is tested in the same way as for pet-
rol cars. The system is closed which means that
leaks are avoided during filling, for example. The
gas tanks are protected and are made to with-
stand a collision. The gas is lighter than air, non-
Related information toxic and has a higher ignition temperature than
• Environmental philosophy (p. 22) petrol and diesel. The risk of fire or explosions in
the event of traffic accidents is therefore lower
than with petrol and diesel.
The tank is equipped with a safety valve that
allows the gas to evacuate from the tank in the
event of abnormally high pressures. This valve
ensures that the tank cannot explode.
}}
* Option/accessory. 25
INTRODUCTION
WARNING
Smoking and naked flames are prohibited
during refuelling, service and repair work. In
the event of a possible fire, leave the vehicle
immediately and stand a safe distance away.
Do not under any circumstances disassemble
or adjust the system or its component parts
yourself. Carrying out such acts entails risk of
serious personal injury. All service and repair
work must therefore, for safety reasons, only
be carried out by a trained mechanic - an
authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
If you smell gas in or around the vehicle,
switch over to petrol immediately and have
the vehicle checked by the nearest trained
mechanics.
If the car is placed in a spray/paint curing
booth with a drying temperature higher than
60 °C the system pressure must not exceed
50 bar, check that the CNG tank is almost
empty for this.
26 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
SAFETY
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal
shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen). Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
designed to protect in a normal seating position. the protective characteristics of the seatbelt
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten may have been lost, even if it appears to be
undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if
their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and
the belt is worn or damaged. The new seat-
visual reminder (p. 31). belt must be type-approved and intended for
installation in the same position as the
replaced seatbelt.
28
SAFETY
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing • if it is pulled out too quickly
its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud • during braking and acceleration
"click" indicates that the belt has locked. • if the car leans heavily.
Related information
• Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
• Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the • Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
shoulder.
1 Certain markets.
29
SAFETY
Seatbelt - loosening Seatbelt - pregnancy position the seat with as large a distance as pos-
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is sta- Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during sible between abdomen and steering wheel.
tionary. pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
Related information
correct way.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and • Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
Related information
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
G020998
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat (p. 83) and steering wheel
(p. 88) such that they can easily maintain con-
trol of the vehicle as they drive (which means that
they must be able to easily operate the foot ped-
als and steering wheel). The aim should be to
30
SAFETY
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instru-
ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or
if one of the rear doors has been opened.
31
SAFETY
32
SAFETY
workshop. Do not drive with deployed air- tive work in the airbag system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
bags.
injury.
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car. • Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's NOTE
safety systems. The detectors react differently depending on
• Always contact a doctor. the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
WARNING positions.
The airbag system's control module is located It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
in the centre console. If the centre console is of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
drenched with water or other liquid, discon- detectors sense the force of the collision on
nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
G018666
start the car since the airbags may deploy. ingly so that one or more airbags are
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that deployed.
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car. you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
}}
33
SAFETY
Related information
• Passenger airbag (p. 34)
34
SAFETY
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label WARNING
drive car. becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. Do not put objects in front of or above the
The warning label for the passenger airbag is dashboard where the passenger airbag is
Label for passenger airbag located.
positioned as shown above.
WARNING WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
the front passenger seat.
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
Label on the passenger side's sun visor. endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
}}
35
SAFETY
|| Switch - PACOS* Passenger airbag - activating/ (children and adults) can sit safely on the
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated deactivating* passenger seat.
(p. 36) if the car is equipped with a switch, The front passenger airbag (p. 34) can be deac- OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). tivated if the car is equipped with a switch, switch in this position, children in rear-facing
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). child seats can sit safely on the front pas-
WARNING senger seat.
If the car is equipped with an airbag for the Switch - PACOS
front passenger seat, but does not have a The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is
switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
WARNING
located on the passenger end of the instrument
Switch), then the airbag will always be acti- panel and is accessible when the passenger door Activated airbag (passenger seat):
vated. is open. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
Check that the switch is in the required position. passenger seat when the passenger airbag is
Related information activated.
The remote control key's key blade (p. 169)
• Driver airbag (p. 34) should be used to change position. Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
• Child seats (p. 45) Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat
when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key posi-
tion II (p. 82) the warning symbol (p. 32) for
the airbag is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel for approx. 6 seconds.
Location of airbag switch.
ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch Following which, the indicator in the roof con-
in this position, all front-facing passengers sole is illuminated showing the correct status
for the front passenger seat airbag.
36 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Related information
• Child seats (p. 45)
G017800
G017724
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated. Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deacti-
vated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is A text message and a symbol in the roof console
activated (see preceding illustration). indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
seat if the passenger airbag is activated and Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
the symbol in the roof console is illumi- senger seat if the message in the roof con-
nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this sole indicates that the airbag is deactivated,
advice could endanger the life of the child. and if the warning symbol (p. 32) for the air-
bag system is also displayed on the combined
instrument panel. This indicates that there has
been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop
as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
37
SAFETY
38
SAFETY
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the windows in the doors.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of headlining, may be compromised.
the SIPS system (p. 38) and the airbag system
(p. 33). It is fitted along both sides of the headlin-
ing and helps protect the driver and passengers WARNING
in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent colli- The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
sion trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
inflated.
Related information
• General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
}}
39
SAFETY
|| and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an WHIPS - seating position
influence. For optimum protection from the WHIPS system
(p. 39) the driver and passenger must have the
WARNING correct seating position and make sure that the
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the system's function is not obstructed.
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
Seat properties (p. 83) before driving starts.
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to change Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
the seating position of the driver and front seat centre of the seat with as little space as possible
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash between the head and the head restraint.
injury. Function
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
• WHIPS - seating position (p. 40) Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's
seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS sys-
• General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
tem from functioning.
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end col-
lision, where the angle and speed of the collision,
40
SAFETY
41
SAFETY
42
SAFETY
Safety mode - attempting to start WARNING Safety mode - moving the car
the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 42) then an restart the car if it smells of fuel when the See manual has been reset after attempting to
attempt to start the car can be made if every- Safety mode See manual message is dis- start the car (p. 43) , the car can be moved care-
thing seems normal and the absence of fuel played. Leave the car at once. fully out of a dangerous position.
leakage has been checked.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. WARNING
There must be no smell of fuel either. Related information
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
• General information on safety mode (p. 42)
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
attempt to start the car. to an authorised Volvo workshop.
43
SAFETY
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
44 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement. }}
45
SAFETY
|| Weight Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
airbag, only rear-facing child airbag, only front-facing
seats) child seats)
Group 0 Child seats which are univer- Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are univer-
sally approved. sally approved.
max 10 kg (U)
(U) (U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1 Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Convertible Child Seat) – rear- Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
9-18 kg
facing child seat, secured with with the car's seatbelt and straps.
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing child seat Volvo rear-facing child seat
9-18 kg Type approval: E5 04212 Type approval: E5 04212
(L) (L)
Group 1 Front-facing child seats Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are univer-
which are universally sally approved.
9-18 kg (U)
approved.A (U)
(UF)
46
SAFETY
Weight Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
airbag, only rear-facing child airbag, only front-facing
seats) child seats)
Group 2 Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Convertible Child Seat) – rear- Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
15-25 kg
facing child seat, secured with with the car's seatbelt and straps.
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing child seat Volvo rear-facing child seat
15-25 kg Type approval: E5 04212 Type approval: E5 04212
(L) (L)
Group 2 Volvo turnable child seat Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Volvo turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured (Volvo Convertible Child Seat)
15-25 kg
Seat) - front-facing child with the car's seatbelt. - front-facing child seat,
seat, secured with the car's secured with the car's seat-
Type approval: E5 04191
seatbelt. belt.
(U)
Type approval: E5 04191 Type approval: E5 04191
(U) (U)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Volvo booster seat with back-
backrest (Volvo Booster Booster Seat with backrest). rest (Volvo Booster Seat with
15-36 kg
Seat with backrest). backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
04301169
(UF)
(UF)
}}
47
SAFETY
|| Weight Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
airbag, only rear-facing child airbag, only front-facing
seats) child seats)
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster cushion with and
without backrest (Booster (Booster Cushion with and without without backrest (Booster
15-36 kg
Cushion with and without backrest). Cushion with and without
backrest). backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
Type approval: E5 04216 Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
(UF) (UF)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat Volvo booster seat Volvo booster seat
15-36 kg Type approval: E1 Type approval: E1 04301312 Type approval: E1 04301312
04301312
(UF, L) (UF)
(UF)
Group 2/3 Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fit-
15-36 kg
ted option.
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
48
SAFETY
Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 50)
• Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 58)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
• General information on child safety (p. 44)
49
SAFETY
Child seats - location Label for passenger airbag You may place:
The position of a child in the car and the choice • a rear-facing child seat on the front passen-
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight ger seat when the passenger airbag is deac-
and size. tivated.
• a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on
the front passenger seat when the passen-
ger airbag is activated.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions in
the rear seat.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
Label on the passenger side's sun visor. protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
G020739
50
SAFETY
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country. Incorrect positioning, the seatbelt must not be placed
beneath the shoulder.
Check what does apply.
Check before driving that:
Related information • the integrated two-stage booster seat is cor-
• Child seats (p. 45) rectly set in accordance with the table
(p. 52) and in locked position
• General information on child safety (p. 44)
• Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 58) • the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
the shoulder. throat or below the shoulder (see preceding
illustrations)
• the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec-
tion.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is per-
formed by raising (p. 52) and lowering (p. 53).
}}
* Option/accessory. 51
SAFETY
3 Lower stage.
52 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset
by being fully folded down (p. 53) into the Pull the handle forwards to release the cush-
seat cushion. ion.
Related information
• Two-stage booster seat* - lowering (p. 53)
4 Upper stage. }}
* Option/accessory. 53
SAFETY
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are
toys) left behind in the space under the cush- concealed behind the lower section of the rear
ion before lowering. seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
NOTE by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre-
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the ceding illustration).
booster cushion must be lowered first. Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Related information Always follow the manufacturer's installation
• Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 52) instructions when connecting a child seat to the
ISOFIX mounting points.
54 * Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
55
SAFETY
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
56
SAFETY
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA
(IUF)
B1 X OKA
(IUF)
A X OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p. 55)
of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 54) fixture system.
57
SAFETY
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the attachment
point.
Related information
The upper mounting points are primarily intended • General information on child safety (p. 44)
for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recom-
mends that small children should sit in rear-fac-
• Child seats - location (p. 50)
ing child seats to as late an age as possible. • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
58
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
60
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
61
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Screen for infotain- (p. 115) and Bonnet opener (p. 371).
ment system and dis- the Sensus
play of menus Infotainment Parking brake (p. 303).
supplement.
62 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
63
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
64
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 65
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
66
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Functionality check Digital combined instrument panel -
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute All indicator and warning symbols, apart from overview
(rpm). symbols in the centre of the information display, The combined instrument panel's information
Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indicator3 illuminate in key position II or when the engine is display shows information on some of the car's
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or started. When the engine has started, all the functions, as well as messages.
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284). symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is Information display
Indicator and warning symbols disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 71)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning of Information display, digital instrument panel*.
warning symbols (p. 73)
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument The combined instrument panel's information dis-
panel.
play shows information on some of the car's
Indicator symbols functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as
well as messages. The information is shown with
Indicator and warning symbols
symbols and text. There are further descriptions
Warning symbols4 under the functions that use the display.
2 Manual gearbox.
3 Automatic gearbox.
}}
4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 373).
* Option/accessory. 67
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
For more information on menu navigation, see Temperature gauge for engine coolant. Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel guide* (p. 70).
Speedometer.
(p. 112). Speedometer.
The choice of theme and setting of contrast Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
mode and colour mode can be stored for each speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
remote control key in the car key memory*, see (rpm).
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163). Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7.
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284). See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).
5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox.
7 Automatic gearbox.
68 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Theme "Performance" Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power Functionality check
guide* (p. 70). All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. symbols in the centre of the information display,
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284). started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
Indicator and warning symbols symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to Related information
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator • Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- • Combined instrument panel - meaning of
nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and indicator symbols (p. 71)
Filling up with fuel (p. 310). • Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Temperature gauge for engine coolant. warning symbols (p. 73)
Indicator symbols
Speedometer.
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute Warning symbols8
(rpm).
5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox.
7 Automatic gearbox.
8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 373).
* Option/accessory. 69
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Eco guide & Power guide* Instantaneous value To view this function, select the theme
Eco guide and Power guide are two combined "Performance"; see Digital combined instrument
Average value panel - overview (p. 67).
instrument panel (p. 66) instruments which help
the driver to drive the car with optimum driving
economy. Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
The car also stores statistics of journeys made, higher the reading on the scale, the better.
which can be viewed in the form of a block dia-
gram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* The instantaneous value is calculated based on
(p. 124). speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus
use of the foot brake.
Eco guide Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and
This instrument provides an indication of how low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers
economically the car is being driven. fall during acceleration and braking.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red
Digital combined instrument panel - overview zone on the meter (with a short delay), which
(p. 67). means poor driving economy and hence should Available engine power
be avoided.
Engine power utilised
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantane- Available engine power
ous value and describes how the car has been The smaller, upper pointer shows the available
driven most recently. The higher the pointers on engine power9. The higher the reading on the
the scale, the better the economy achieved by scale, the more power is available in the current
the driver. gear.
Power guide Engine power utilised
This instrument shows the relationship between The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power
how much power (Power) is being taken from the utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the
engine and how much power is available. more power is being taken from the engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a
large power reserve.
70 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel - Symbol Specification 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
meaning of indicator symbols engine.
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- Main beam On
2. Restart the engine.
tion is activated, that the system is operating, or
that an error or failure has occurred. Left-hand direction indicator 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a
workshop to have the ABS system checked.
Indicator symbols Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
Right-hand direction indicator from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Symbol Specification
Rear fog lamp on
ABL fault Eco- function on, see Drive mode
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is
ECO* (p. 298)
switched on.
Emissions system Start/Stop, the engine auto-stop- Stability system
ped; see Start/Stop* - function and A flashing symbol indicates that the stability sys-
ABS fault operation (p. 291) tem is operating. If the symbol illuminates with
Tyre pressure system , see Tyre constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Rear fog lamp on pressure monitoring* (p. 346) Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is
Stability system, see Electronic sta- ABL fault activated. Sport mode allows for a more active
bility control (ESC) - general The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the driving experience. The system then detects
(p. 191) ABL function (Active Bending Lights). whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than in
Stability system, sport mode, see Emissions system normal driving and then allows controlled skid-
Electronic stability control (ESC) - If the symbol illuminates after the engine has ding of the rear section up to a certain level
operation (p. 192) been started then it may be due to a fault in the before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for
Engine preheater (diesel) Engine preheater (diesel)
checking. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop. This symbol illuminates during engine preheating.
Low level in fuel tank Preheating takes place mostly due to low tem-
ABS fault perature.
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
Information, read display text working. The car's regular brake system contin- Low level in fuel tank
ues to work, but without the ABS function. When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel
tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
}}
* Option/accessory. 71
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
72 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
73
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Fault in brake system WARNING 2. Read the information on the information dis-
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level play. Implement the action in accordance
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the with the message in the display. Clear the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further message using the OK button.
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see before topping up the brake fluid.
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 377). Reminder – doors not closed
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake contact an authorised Volvo workshop. information or warning symbol illuminates
force distribution system. together with an explanatory image in the infor-
mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the WARNING soon as possible and close the door that is open.
engine.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the If the car is driven at a speed lower than
2. Restart the engine. same time, there is a risk that the rear end will approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
skid during heavy braking.
• If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- information symbol illuminates.
ing. If the car is driven at a speed higher than
Warning
• If the symbols remain illuminated, check
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see warning symbol illuminates.
has been indicated which could affect the safety
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 377). If
and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the
the brake fluid level is normal but the
is shown on the information display at the same warning symbol illuminates together with an
symbols are still illuminated, the car can
time. The symbol remains visible until the fault explanatory image in the information display. Stop
be driven, with great care, to a workshop
has been rectified but the text message can be the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
to have the brake system checked. Volvo
cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation close the bonnet.
recommends that you seek assistance
- combined instrument panel (p. 112). The warn-
from an authorised Volvo workshop. If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
ing symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
information symbol illuminates together with an
other symbols.
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
Action: the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car fur- close the tailgate.
ther.
74 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Display for outside temperature gauge, digi- Trip meter, digital instrument panel.
tal instrument panel Display for trip meter12
Display for outside temperature gauge, ana- Both trip meters T1 and T2 are used to measure
logue instrument panel short distances. The distance is shown in the dis-
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to -5 play.
°C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display.
Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel to
This warns of icy roads. If the car has been sta-
show the required meter.
tionary, the gauge may display a reading that is
too high. A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch RESET button resets the
Related information trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66) computer (p. 116).
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 66)
75
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Clock Fuel gauge for vehicle gas*14 Number of Colour of Fuel level
The clock display appears in the combined The Bi-Fuel model variant has a separate fuel LEDs LEDs (%)
instrument panel. gauge for vehicle gas.
1 Green 20
1 Red 10
NOTE
Ensure that the petrol tank never runs dry
because the car always starts on petrol.
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Markings above the switch show the current fuel
Display for showing the time13 level.
76 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel - product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers Symbols in the display
license agreement spare parts or customer support. There are a variety of different symbols in the
A license is an agreement for the right to oper- Portions of this product uses software display in the car. The symbols are divided into
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project warning, indicator and information symbols.
else's entitlement according to the terms and (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
conditions in the agreement. The following text is Shown below are the most common symbols with
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- Portions of this product uses software with their meanings and a reference to where in the
oper. Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio manual further information can be found.
(http://www.lua.org/)
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a
Combined Instrument Panel Software
fault has been indicated which could affect the
Open Source Software Notice
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explana-
This product uses certain free / open source and tory text is shown in the information display in the
other software originating from third parties, that combined instrument panel at the same time.
is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public
License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType - Information symbol, illuminates in combi-
Project License ("FreeType License") and other nation with text in the information display in the
This product includes software under combined instrument panel, when a deviation in
different and/or additional copy right licenses,
following licenses: any of the car's systems has occurred. The infor-
disclaimers and notices. The links to access the
exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunction
source software licenses, disclaimers, licenses/lgpl-2.1.html with other symbols.
acknowledgements and notices are provided to
you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the
• GNU FriBidi Warning symbols in the combined
relevant License, regarding your rights under said • DevIL instrument panel
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to The FreeType Project License: http://
provide the source code of said free/open source git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/ Symbol Specification See
software to you for a charge covering the cost of tree/docs/FTL.TXT Low oil pressure (p. 73)
performing such distribution, such as the cost of
media, shipping and handling, upon written
• FreeType 2
request. Please contact your nearest Volvo MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/ Parking brake (p. 73),
Dealer. mit-license.html applied (p. 303)
77
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
78 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Windscreen sensor*, (p. 94), Start/Stop* (p. 296) Engine block heater (p. 144)
Camera sensor*, (p. 228), and passenger com-
Laser sensor* (p. 238), partment heater*
(p. 251), Service required
(p. 255), Start/Stop* (p. 296)
(p. 260) Activated timer* (p. 144)
Active main beam, (p. 94) Park Assist Pilot - (p. 268)
AHB (Active High PAP*
}}
Beam)*
* Option/accessory. 79
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Information symbols in the roof console Volvo Sensus be personalised by means of an intuitive user
display Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo interface. Settings can be made in Car settings,
experience and connects you with the car and Audio and media, Climate control, etc.
Symbol Specification See
outside world. Sensus provides information, With the centre console buttons and controls or
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31) entertainment and assistance when it is needed. the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions
Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both can be activated or deactivated and many differ-
Airbag, passenger seat, (p. 36) enhance the car journey and simplifies owner- ent settings can be made.
activated ship of the car.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
Airbag, passenger seat, (p. 36) such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic
deactivated fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function RADIO,
Related information MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM15 other
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of sources, systems and functions can be activated,
indicator symbols (p. 71)
e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth®*, naviga-
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning of tion* and park assist camera*.
warning symbols (p. 73)
For more information about all functions/
• Messages - handling (p. 115) An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
to receive relevant support, information and
manual or its supplement.
entertainment when it is necessary, without dis-
tracting the driver.
Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable
connection* to the outside world and provides
you with intuitive control over all the car's capabil-
ities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func-
tions in several of the car's systems on the centre
console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can
80 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key incor-
rectly turned - hold the end with the detacha-
Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic ble key blade, see Detachable key blade -
- the number of functions and layout of the buttons both
detaching/attaching (p. 169).
vary, depending on the equipment selected and the mar-
ket.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement Remove the remote control key
(Sensus Navigation). Grip the remote control key and pull it out from
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ the ignition switch.
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see
inserted.
separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR
NOTE
(p. 115).
For cars with the keyless start and lock sys-
Internet-connected car - *, see separate tem* the remote control key does not need to
supplement (Sensus Infotainment). be inserted into the ignition switch but can be
Climate control system (p. 126). stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information
on the keyless start and lock system, see
Park assist camera* (p. 265) – CAM*. Keyless drive* (p. 173).
* Option/accessory. 81
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
16 Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*.
17 Approx. 2 seconds.
82 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 83
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| 4. Push the seat forward so that the head Seats, front - electrically operated* should happen, set the car's electrical system in
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox. The car's front seats have different setting key position I or 0 and wait a short time before
options for optimum seating comfort. The power adjusting the seat again.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be inward/outward) can be made at a time.
WARNING
raised/lowered. The backrest angle and lumbar
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is support* can be changed. Preparations
properly locked after being folded up in order The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after
to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden Power seat unlocking the door with the remote control key
braking or an accident.
without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjust-
ment is normally made in key position I and can
Related information always be made when the engine is running.
• Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84)
Seat with memory function*
• Seats, rear (p. 85)
Raise/lower seat
Seat, forward/backward
Backrest rake The memory function stores settings for the seat
and the door mirrors.
Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and out-
ward
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
84 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
19 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and power retractable door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored. }}
* Option/accessory. 85
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Pull the locking handle closest to the head • The centre section can be folded separately.
restraint to fold the head restraint forward. • The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
The head restraint is moved back manually until a
"click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked posi-
tion after being raised.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
86
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the
head restraints must be moved forward
slightly so as not to make contact with the 1. The remote control key must be in key posi-
seat cushion. tion II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head
Raising takes place in reverse order. restraints to improve rearward visibility.
NOTE WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is are passengers in any of the outer seats.
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
}}
* Option/accessory. 87
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Move the head restraint back manually until a Steering wheel 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel
click is heard. The steering wheel can be adjusted in different in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
positions and has controls for horn and cruise wheel lightly at the same time as you push
WARNING control, as well as menu, audio and phone con- the lever back.
The head restraints must be in locked posi- trol.
tion after being raised. WARNING
Adjusting
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
Related information driving away.
• Seats, front (p. 83)
With speed related power steering* the level of
• Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84)
steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable
steering force* (p. 190).
88 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Function
* Option/accessory. 89
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Position Specification
90 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 91
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Position lamps exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime Daytime running lights
Position lamps are switched on using the head- running lights are switched on and Reset light
With the knob for headlamp control in
lamp control's knob. switch position is shown in the combined position, and the car's electrical system in key
instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a position II or the engine running, the daytime
mode other than . running lights are activated automatically in day-
light.
Related information
• Light switches (p. 90) Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
92
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamp are Tunnel detection* Main/dipped beam
activated. Tunnel detection changes the lighting from day- With the knob for headlamp control in position
time running lights to dipped beam when the car and the car's electrical system in key posi-
WARNING is driven into a tunnel. tion II or the engine running, the dipped beam is
This system help to save energy - it cannot activated automatically in poor light conditions.
The tunnel detection function is available in cars
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
rain. entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from
daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the
ance with applicable traffic regulations. car is driven into another tunnel within this time
period then dipped beam is kept switched on.
This avoids repeated changes to the car's light-
Related information ing.
• Main/dipped beam (p. 93)
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
• Light switches (p. 90)
remain in position for tunnel detection to
work.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Related information Position for main beam flash
• Main/dipped beam (p. 93)
Position for main beam
• Light switches (p. 90)
Dipped beam
With the knob in position, dipped beam is
activated automatically at twilight or when day-
light becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also
activated automatically if the windscreen wipers
or the rear fog lamps are activated.
With the knob in position dipped beam is
always switched on when the engine is running
}}
or when key position II is active.
* Option/accessory. 93
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Main beam flash • Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern Active main beam*
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering (p. 98) Active main beam function detects the headlamp
wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main • Tunnel detection* (p. 93) beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from
main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns
Main beam to main beam when the incoming light has stop-
Main beam can be activated when the knob is in
ped.
position 20 or . Activate/deactivate
main beam by moving the stalk switch towards Active main beam - AHB
the steering wheel to the end position and then Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a
releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be function which uses a camera sensor at the top
deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp
toward the steering wheel. beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and then switches from main
When main beam has been activated the beam to dipped beam. The function can also take
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument streetlights into account.
panel.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
Auxiliary lamps* sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use vehicles ahead.
the MY CAR menu system to choose whether
Car with halogen headlamps
they should be deactivated or switched on/off
simultaneously with the main beam21, see MY The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
CAR (p. 115). ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
Related information rear lights from vehicles in front.
• Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 97) Car with active Xenon headlamps
• Active main beam* (p. 94)
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
• Light switches (p. 90) ity22 then the lighting returns to main beam about
94 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
a second after the camera sensor no longer Activating/deactivating When AHB is activated the symbol illumi-
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming AHB can be activated when the headlamp con- nates in the instrument's information display.
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. trol's knob is in position (provided that the
When main beam is switched on the sym-
If the active main beam has adaptive functional- function has not been deactivated in the menu
bol also illuminates in the combined instrument
ity22 then, unlike what happens during conven- system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115)).
panel. This also applies for active Xenon head-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- soon as the light beam shines with slightly more
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the than dipped beam.
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed. Car with digital combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the symbol turns
white in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol turns
blue. This also applies for active Xenon head-
lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as
soon as the light beam shines with slightly more
than dipped beam.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO
position.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph) or higher.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly toward
oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand
sides of the vehicle. stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
end position and then releasing. Deactivation
The lighting returns to full main beam about a when main beam is on means that the lights are
second after the camera sensor no longer reset directly to dipped beam.
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
95
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If the message Active main beam Temporary • In heavy rain or dense fog
unavailable Switch manually is shown in the • In freezing rain
combined instrument panel's information display • In snow flurries or slush
then you have to switch manually between main
and dipped beam. However, the knob for head-
• In moonlight
lamp control can still remain in position . • When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
The same applies if the message Windscreen • When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
sensors blocked See manual and the • If there are pedestrians on or beside the
symbol are shown. The symbol goes out road
when these messages are shown. • If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situa-
tions with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB • When the lighting from oncoming traffic
becomes available again, or the windscreen sen- is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
sors are no longer blocked, the message extin- • When there is traffic on connecting roads
guishes and the symbol illuminates. • On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
• In sharp bends.
96 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Active Xenon headlamps* tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights CAR (p. 115)). In the event of a fault in the func- in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
are designed to provide maximum illumination in tion the symbol illuminates in the com- The function is activated when main beam or
bends and junctions and so provide increased bined instrument panel at the same time as the dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower
safety. information display shows an explanatory text and than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).
a further illuminated symbol.
Active xenon headlamps/active In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
bending lights - ABL as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
Symbol Message Specification
reversing.
Headlamp The system is dis-
system engaged. Visit a Related information
malfunction workshop if the • Main/dipped beam (p. 93)
Service message remains. • Active main beam* (p. 94)
required Volvo recommends • Light switches (p. 90)
that you contact an
authorised Volvo
workshop.
* Option/accessory. 97
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
98 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)
99
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
direction indicators The stalk switch remains in its position and is Interior lighting
The car's direction indicators are operated with moved back manually, or automatically by the The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator steering wheel movement. vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
Direction indicator symbols
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined
moved.
instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
(p. 71).
Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 99)
G021149
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Direction indicators. Reading lamp, left-hand side
Short flash sequence Reading lamp, right-hand side
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator Interior lighting
lamps flash three times. The function can be
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
from when:
Continuous flash sequence • the engine has been switched off and the
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end car's electrical system is in key position 0
position.
• the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
100
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Front roof lighting Vanity mirror lighting functions (p. 166) or Detachable key blade -
The front reading lamps are switched on or off by The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 153) is unlocking doors (p. 170)
pressing the relevant button in the roof console. switched on and off respectively when the cover • the engine has been switched off and the
is opened or closed. car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Rear roof lighting
Lighting in the cargo area Passenger compartment lighting is switched off
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and when:
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or • the engine is started
closed.
• the car is locked.
Automatic lighting The passenger compartment lighting comes on
The switch for passenger compartment lighting and remains on for two minutes if one of the
has three positions for the lighting in the passen- doors is open.
ger compartment:
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
G021150 • Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic car is locked then it will be switched off automati-
lighting deactivated. cally after two minutes.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-
Ambience lights*
Rear roof lighting. vated.
When the normal passenger compartment light-
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing • On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger ing is switched off and the engine is running, a
each respective button. compartment lighting switched on. number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the
Courtesy lighting ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and
Neutral position enhance the mood while driving. The light also
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment When the button is in neutral position the pas-
lighting) is switched on and off respectively when makes it easier to see objects in storage com-
senger compartment lighting is switched on and
a side door is opened or closed. partments etc. during the darker hours of the day.
off automatically in accordance with the following.
This lighting goes out for a little while after the
Glovebox lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched normal passenger compartment lighting when
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- on and remains on for 30 seconds if: the car is locked. The brightness is controlled
tively when the lid is opened or closed. using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control
• the car is unlocked with the remote control
(p. 90).
key or key blade, see Remote control key -
* Option/accessory. 101
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on with the remote Windscreen wipers24
switched on to work as home safe lighting after control key, see Remote control key - functions
the car has been locked. (p. 166), and is used to switch on the car's light-
ing at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch. When the function is activated with the remote
control key, position lamps, lamps in the door mir-
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
rors, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps
steering wheel to the end position and
and courtesy lighting are switched on.
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash; see The length of time for which the approach light-
Main/dipped beam (p. 93). ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam, Related information
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors and • Home safe lighting (p. 102)
number plate lighting are switched on. Rain sensor, On/Off
The length of time for which the home safe light- Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
ing should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115). Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
Related information
switch off the windscreen wipers.
• Approach lighting (p. 102)
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
24 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 388). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 390).
102
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory. 103
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Washing the windscreen Wiping and washing the rear window Wiper – reversing
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. ers are on initiates intermittent rear window wip-
The windscreen wipers will make several more ing25. The function stops when reverse gear is
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the disengaged.
stalk switch has been released. If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing
NOTE
solid. On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
High-pressure headlamp washing* activated and it is raining.
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
Related information
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
fifth windscreen wash cycle. • Washer fluid - filling (p. 390)
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in
Reduced washing the illustration above) to initiate rear window
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in washing and wiping.
the reservoir and the message that you should fill
the washer fluid is shown in the combined instru- NOTE
ment panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is in order to pri- The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
oritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility heating protection which means that the
through it. motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling-
down period.
25 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
104 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to Operating the power windows.
always switch off the power supply to the
Operating without auto
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with you Operating with auto
when leaving the car. For information on key
positions - see Key positions - functions at All power windows can be operated using the
Driver's door control panel.
different levels (p. 82). control panel for the driver's door - the control
Electric child safety locks that prevent chil-
panels for the other doors can only operate their
dren from being able to open the rear doors
respective power window. Only one control panel
from inside* and open/close the rear win-
can be operated at a time.
dows, see Child safety locks - electrical acti-
vation* (p. 184). In order for the power windows to be used, the
key position must be at least I - see Key posi-
Controls for rear windows
tions - functions at different levels (p. 82). The
Controls for front windows power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
}}
* Option/accessory. 105
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- Resetting Door mirrors
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement. If the battery is disconnected then the function The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
It is possible to override the pinch protection for automatic opening must be reset so that it joystick in the driver's door controls.
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is can work correctly.
ice forming. After two successive closing inter-
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
ruptions the pinch protection will be forced and
raise the window to its end position and hold
the automatic function deactivated for a short
it there for one second.
while, now it is possible to close by continually
holding the button pulled up. 2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
NOTE for one second.
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also WARNING
open the front windows slightly. A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Operating without auto Controls for door mirrors.
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the Adjusting
control is held in position. 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door
Operating with auto mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto- 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
matically to its end position. centre.
Operating with the remote control key or 3. Press the L or R button again. The light
central locking button should no longer be illuminated.
To operate the power windows from the outside
with the remote control key, or from inside with
the central locking button, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 166) or Locking/unlocking -
from the inside (p. 179).
106
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING automatically returns to its original position after Retractable power door mirrors*
a short time. The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to pro- in narrow spaces:
vide optimal vision. Objects may appear fur- The function can be activated/deactivated in the
ther away than they actually are. menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115). 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(key position must be at least I).
Automatic retraction when locking*
Storing settings26 When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote 2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
The settings for the door mirrors and the posi- control key the door mirrors are automatically The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
tions of the driver's seat can be stored for each retracted/extended. retracted position.
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
The function can be activated/deactivated in the Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163).
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115). R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
Angling the door mirror when parking26 cally stop in the fully extended position.
The door mirror can be angled down for the
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by Home safe and approach lighting
driver to view the side of the road when parking The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when
an external force must be reset electrically to the
for example. approach lighting (p. 102) or home safe lighting
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R to work correctly: (p. 102) is selected.
button.
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons. Related information
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror • Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108)
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
tons. • Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 108)
button labelled L or R respectively. 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Automatic angling of the door mirror The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
when parking26 Automatic dimming*
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
automatically angled down so that the driver can requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
see the side of the road when parking for exam- automatic dimming, see Rearview mirror - interior
ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror (p. 108).
26 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84).
* Option/accessory. 107
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Windows and rearview and door the battery unnecessarily. However, the function Rearview mirror - interior
mirrors - heating is switched off automatically after a certain time. The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
and ice from the windscreen, rear window and screen (p. 136). the rearview mirror dims automatically.
door mirrors.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/
Heated windscreen*, rear window and defrosted automatically if the car is started in an
door mirrors outside temperature lower than +7 °C. Automatic
defrosting can be selected in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).
Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function,
the heated windscreen is demisted/defrosted
automatically if the ambient temperature is lower
than +5 °C and automatic defrosting has been
selected in the menu system MY CAR.
Manual dimming
Heating, windscreen Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim-
Heating, rear window and door mirrors ming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
The function is used to remove ice and misting
from the windscreen, rear window and door mir- 1. Use dimming by moving the control in
rors. towards the passenger compartment.
One press of the respective button starts the 2. Return to normal position by moving the con-
heating. The light in the button indicates that the trol towards the windscreen.
function is active. Switch off the heating as soon
as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load
108 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory. 109
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at
the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or II
is required for the sunroof to be opened.
Magnetic zones.
Horizontal opening
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
G017823
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
Opening, automatic
circles to fine-tune calibration.
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
110 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
G021345
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control forwards
to the point of resistance for manual closing. The Remote control key
sunroof moves to the closed position while the – Give one long press on the remote control
control is being pressed forwards. key's lock button until the sunroof and
all the windows are closed and the doors and
WARNING the tailgate are locked.
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is closed. To interrupt closing, press the remote control
G028900
The sunroof's pinch-protection function only key's lock button again.
operates during automatic closing, not man-
ual. Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the con-
Close automatically by pressing the control to the trol upward.
position for automatic closing and then release it. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control
down.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched off
by selecting key position 0 and removing the
remote control key from the ignition switch.
27 Comfort position is an open position for the sunroof, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. }}
111
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed with the remote con- The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
trol key or the central locking button, check up when the sunroof is in the open position.
that no one risks being trapped.
Related information
Sunscreen • Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior • Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179) Display (analogue combined instrument panel) and con-
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automati- trols for menu navigation.
cally when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle
and slide the sunscreen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof has a pinch protection function
which is triggered if it is blocked by an object
during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof
will stop and automatically open to the previous
position.
112 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
28 Certain engines.
29 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
* Option/accessory. 113
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
114 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must be
read (press OK) before the previous activity
can be resumed.
Related information
• Menu overview - combined instrument panel
(p. 113)
}}
* Option/accessory. 115
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the Trip computer
equipment selected and the market.
The car's trip computer records and calculates
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR. vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre
console or the thumbwheel on the steering Trip computer content and appearance varies
wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu depending on whether the combined instrument
option or store the selected function in the panel is analogue or digital:
memory.
• Trip computer - analogue combined instru-
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console ment panel (p. 118)
or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
scroll up/down through the menu options. • Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 121)
EXIT The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the combined instrument panel's information display30.
EXIT functions Trip meter
Depending on the function the cursor is on when The trip computer has two trip meters and one
EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu odometer for the total mileage.
level, one of the following may occur:
Average
• phone call is rejected
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
• current function is interrupted last resetting.
• input characters are deleted
NOTE
• most recent selections are undone
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven
• leads up in the menu system.
heater* has been used.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view
for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to
the highest menu level (main source menu). Applies to Bi-Fuel* cars
During gas operation the trip computer shows
Menu options and search paths the equivalent average consumption of gas.
For a description of the menu options and search
paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment
supplement.
116 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
30 The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant.
31 Only digital combined instrument panel and certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 117
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
118
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Resetting the trip computer Functions in the combined instrument 2. Press OK.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip panel's menu 3. Browse through the functions with the
computer heading to be reset: T1 and total The combined instrument panel's menu includes thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed. setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below. 4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
2. One long press on RESET resets the value completed checking/adjustment.
for the selected heading. 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of
Each heading must be zeroed individually. a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
Functions Information
Digital speed Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel.
• km/h
• mph
• No display
Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 142).
• DIRECT START
• - Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
• - Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
}}
* Option/accessory. 119
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
|| Functions Information
Additional heater* For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options Here you can activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" -
• Distance to empty tank
others are grey and have no "tick".
• Fuel consumption
• Average speed
• Trip meter T1 and total dist.
• Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 374).
Messages (##) For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 115).
A Certain engines.
Related information
• Trip computer (p. 116)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)
120 * Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
}}
121
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Resetting the trip computer 2. Browse to the Trip computer reset menu 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of
option with the thumbwheel and confirm with a sequence - reset them first with
Trip meter
OK. two presses on RESET.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the head-
ing combination with the trip meter to be 3. Choose to reset average consumption, aver- 2. Press OK.
reset. age speed or to reset both. Confirm the
3. Browse through the functions with the
selection with OK.
2. One long press on RESET resets the value thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
for the selected heading. 4. Finish by pressing RESET.
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
Average speed and average consumption completed checking/adjustment.
1. Press OK to open the combined instrument Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu. panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
Functions Information
Trip computer reset Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.
• Average Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.
• Average speed
Messages For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 115).
Themes Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 66).
122
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Functions Information
Settings* Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).
Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment
heater* - timer (p. 142).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
• - Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 374).
A Certain engines.
Related information
• Trip computer (p. 116)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)
* Option/accessory. 123
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
Trip statistics32 • Trip computer (p. 116)
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven dis-
tance, depending on the scale selected - the bar
at the far right shows the value for the current kil-
ometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars
can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the
cursor on the far right changes position between
up and down in relation to the scale selected.
32 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
124 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
General information on climate a temporary increase in temperature in the • Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)
control passenger compartment. • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
The car is equipped with electronic climate con- • Remove misting on the insides of the win- ment (p. 129)
trol (p. 132). The climate control system cools dows primarily by using the defroster func- • Air quality (p. 127)
or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the tion (p. 136). To reduce the risk of misting,
passenger compartment. keep the windows clean and use window
cleaner.
NOTE
Cars with Start/Stop*
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 136) can be With an auto-stopped (p. 290) engine certain
switched off, but to ensure the best possible equipment may have its function temporarily
climate comfort in the passenger compart- reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 134).
ment, and to prevent the windows from mist-
ing, it should always be switched on. Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function tempo-
To bear in mind rarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO
• To ensure that the air conditioning works (p. 298) function is activated, e.g. the air condi-
optimally, the side windows, and sunroof* tioning (p. 136).
should be closed.
• Global opening (p. 180) opens/closes all NOTE
side windows simultaneously and can be When the ECO function is activated, several
used for example to quickly air the car during parameters in the climate control system's
hot weather. settings are changed, and several electricity
• Remove ice and snow from the climate con- consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
trol system air intake (the grille between the tings can be reset manually, but full function-
bonnet and the windscreen). ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO
function.
• In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal. Related information
• When the engine requires full power, e.g. for • Actual temperature (p. 127)
full acceleration, the air conditioning can be • Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)
temporarily switched off. There may then be
126 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)
* Option/accessory. 127
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality - passenger Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Air quality - IAQS*
compartment filter Package (CZIP)* The air quality system IAQS separates gases
All air entering the car's passenger compartment CZIP comprises a series of modifications that and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
is cleaned with a filter. keep the passenger compartment even clearer pollution in the passenger compartment.
from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. If the outside air is contaminated then the air
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- The following is included: intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
• An enhanced fan function that means that It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
the fan starts when the car is opened with in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
NOTE tion starts when required and is disengaged NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened. The air quality sensor must always be enabled
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
ter is fitted.
gradually due to reduced need up until the partment.
car is 4 years old. In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
Related information to prevent misting.
• Air quality (p. 127) • The air quality system IAQS (p. 128) is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in the In the event of misting, the air quality sensor
passenger compartment from contaminants should be disengaged, and the defroster
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous functions for the windscreen and side win-
oxides and ground-level ozone. dows, as well as the rear window, should be
used.
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126) Related information
• Air quality (p. 127) • General information on climate control
(p. 126)
• Air quality (p. 127)
• Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 128)
128 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality - material Menu settings - climate control Air distribution in the passenger
Tested materials have been developed in order It is possible to activate/deactivate or change compartment
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger the default settings for six of the climate control The incoming air is divided between a number of
compartment and to contribute to making the system's functions via the centre console. different vents in the passenger compartment.
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
• Fan level during automatic climate control
The carpets in both the passenger compartment (p. 135).
and the cargo area are removable and easy to • Recirculation timer (p. 137).
remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car
care products recommended by Volvo to clean • Automatic start of rear window defroster
the interior (p. 414). (p. 108)1.
• Interior air quality system* (p. 128).
Related information
• Air quality (p. 127) • Automatic start of seat heating driver
(p. 133).
• Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 89).
More information is available in the description of
the menu system (p. 115). Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode.
The climate control system's functions can be If necessary it can be controlled manually; see
reset in the menu system MY CAR to the default the air distribution table (p. 138).
settings. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 115).
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)
1 Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function, the heated windscreen is also demisted/defrosted automatically if the setting for rear window defroster is activated. }}
* Option/accessory. 129
CLIMATE CONTROL
|| Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars Air distribution
Vertical airflow Vertical airflow The figure consists of three buttons. When press-
ing the buttons the corresponding figure is illumi-
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting nated in the screen (see following figure) and an
remove misting. in cold weather. arrow in front of each part of the figure shows
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to the air distribution that is selected. For more
maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in information, see the air distribution table
hot weather. (p. 138).
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensi-
tive to air flows and draughts.
130
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)
• Auto-regulation (p. 135)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
131
CLIMATE CONTROL
Electronic climate control - ECC ment and can be set separately for the driver's The auto function is used to automatically con-
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the side and passenger side. trol temperature, air conditioning, fan speed,
temperature selected in the passenger compart- recirculation and air distribution.
Temperature control (p. 135), left-hand side Rear window and door mirror defrosters Related information
(p. 108) • General information on climate control
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left (p. 126)
side Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right
side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
Temperature control (p. 135), right-hand
(p. 136)
side
Fan (p. 134)
Recirculation (p. 137)
Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor
ECO* (p. 298)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 135)
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 136)
132 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heated front seats* There are three heat levels that give different Related information
The front seat heating has three positions for heating outputs: • General information on climate control
(p. 126)
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger • Highest heat level - three orange fields illu-
when it is cold. minate in the centre console's screen (see • Heated rear seat* (p. 134)
figure above).
• Lower heat level - two orange fields illumi-
nate in the screen.
• Lowest heat level - one orange field illumi-
nates in the screen.
• Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
Current heat level is shown in the centre console display
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
screen.
suffer burn injuries.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different Automatic start of driver's seat heating
levels or to deactivate the func- With the automatic start of the driver's seat heat-
tion. ing activated, the driver's seat will have the high-
est heat level when the engine is started.
Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is lower than
approx. +10 °C.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).
* Option/accessory. 133
CLIMATE CONTROL
2 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 51).
134 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)
135
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air conditioning Demisting and defrosting the For cars without heated windscreen there is one
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies windscreen defrost level:
incoming air as required. Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are • Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illumi-
used to quickly remove misting and ice from the nates in the screen.
When the lamp in the AC but- windscreen and side windows.
ton illuminates, the air condi- • Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
tioning is controlled by the sys- nates.
tem's automatic function. For cars with heated windscreen there are two
When the lamp in the AC but- defrost levels:
ton is switched off the air con- • Start the heating for the windscreen3 - sym-
ditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still bol (1) illuminates in the screen.
controlled automatically. When the max. defroster
function (p. 136) is activated, the air conditioning • Start the heating for the windscreen3 and air
is switched on automatically so that the air is flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2)
dehumidified at the maximum setting. illuminate in the screen.
• Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
nates.
3 If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 109)* must be recalibrated.
136 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
137
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to
from the air vents. achieve this the fan level must not be too low).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
138
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows. to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warm-
ing upwards in cold weather.
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
139
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger Refuelling automatically and a message appears on the
compartment heater* information display. Acknowledge the message
Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 112) OK but-
passenger compartment before departure so ton once.
that both wear and energy needs during the jour-
ney are reduced. IMPORTANT
The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or Repeated use of the heater combined with
with a timer (p. 142). short journeys leads to the battery discharg-
ing and consequential starting problems.
The heater cannot start if the outside tempera-
ture exceeds 15 °C. The heater's maximum run- The car should be driven for the same time as
ning time is 50 minutes. the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace the
Warning label on fuel filler flap. energy consumed by the heater when it is
WARNING used on a regular basis. The heater is used
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before star- Related information
NOTE ting to refuel. • Engine block heater and passenger compart-
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active Check in the combined instrument panel that ment heater* - messages (p. 144)
there may be smoke from the right-hand the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is • Additional heater* (p. 146)
wheel housing, which is perfectly normal. shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.
140 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger Direct start via the remote control key* If the button for information is depressed
compartment heater* - direct start when the heater is active then the indicator lamp
The engine block heater and passenger com- will show the status for this - at the same time
partment heater can be started directly. the car's lock status (p. 167) is shown. While the
status is being investigated the indicator lamp
Direct start can be performed via: emits a pair of short flashes followed by a con-
• information display stant glow if the heater is active.
• remote control key* Status is also shown in the trip computer during
heating.
• mobile*.
Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- Direct start via app*
senger compartment heater (p. 140), it will run Activation and information on selected settings
for 50 minutes. are available via the Volvo On Call* app.
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin Related information
as soon as the engine coolant has reached the The engine block heater and passenger compart-
ment heater can be activated via the remote con- • Engine block heater and passenger compart-
correct temperature. ment heater* - timer (p. 142)
trol key:
NOTE • Engine block heater and passenger compart-
– Hold the button for approach lighting ment heater* - immediate stop (p. 142)
The car can be started and driven while the depressed for 2 seconds.
heater is running.
• Engine block heater and passenger compart-
Hazard warning flashers provide information ment heater* - messages (p. 144)
in accordance with the following:
Direct start via the information display • 5 short flashes followed by a constant
1. Press OK to access the menu. glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking has reached the car and the heater has
heater and select with OK. been activated.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct • 5 short flashes - the signal has reached
start in order to activate the heater and the car but the heater has not been acti-
select with OK. vated.
* Option/accessory. 141
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger Engine block heater and passenger 6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing
compartment heater* - immediate compartment heater* - timer minutes setting.
stop The timer of the engine block and passenger 7. Select the required minute using the thumb-
The engine block heater and passenger com- compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to wheel.
partment heater can be deactivated directly via the car's clock.
8. Press OK5 to confirm the setting.
the information display.
Two different times can be selected using the
9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.
1. Press OK to access the menu. timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system 10. Select the other time (continue from step 2)
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking or exit the menu with RESET.
calculates when heating should be started based
heater and select with OK.
on the outside temperature.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in Starting
order to deactivate the heater and select with 1. Press OK to access the menu.
NOTE
OK. 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
All timer programming will be cleared if the
4. Exit the menu with RESET. heater and select with OK.
car's clock is reset.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
Related information thumbwheel and activate with OK.
• Engine block heater and passenger compart- Adjusting4
ment heater* - direct start (p. 141) 1. Press OK to access the menu. 4. Exit the menu with RESET.
• Engine block heater and passenger compart- 2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 112) to scroll to one Switching off
ment heater* - timer (p. 142) of the timers Parking heater and select A timer-started heater can be switched off man-
• Engine block heater and passenger compart- with OK. ually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as
ment heater* - messages (p. 144) 3. Select one of the two timers using the follows:
thumbwheel and confirm with OK. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours set- 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
ting. heater and select with OK.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb- > If a timer is set but not activated then a
wheel. clock icon is shown beside the set time.
4 Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off.
5 Press OK again to activate the timer.
142 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• Engine block heater and passenger compart-
ment heater* - messages (p. 144)
* Option/accessory. 143
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger When one of the timers has been activated, the Symbol for activated timer in digital
compartment heater* - messages symbol for activated timer illuminates in the dis- combined instrument panel.
Symbols and display messages regarding the play at the same time as the set time is shown
engine block and passenger compartment next to the symbol.
heater (p. 140) differ depending on whether the The table shows symbols and display texts that
Symbol for activated timer in analogue
combined instrument panel (p. 66) is analogue appear.
combined instrument panel.
or digital.
Fuel operated heater stopped Bat- The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
tery saving mode
144 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Fuel operated heater Service Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
required Volvo workshop.
145
CLIMATE CONTROL
Additional heater* Fuel-driven additional heater* 1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi-
In cold climate zones6
an additional heater may The car is equipped with either an electric tion I (p. 82).
be required to obtain the correct operating tem- (p. 147) or a fuel-driven additional heater 2. Press OK to access the menu.
perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient (p. 146).
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heating in the passenger compartment.
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is heater8 or Settings9 and select with OK.
A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 146) is fitted required when the engine is running.
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using
in cars with diesel engines. The heater is switched off automatically when the the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
In a semi-cold6 climate zone diesel-driven cars correct temperature is reached or when the
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
have an electric additional heater (p. 147) engine is switched off.
instead of a fuel-driven version.
NOTE
Cars with certain petrol engines7 have an electric
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key posi-
additional heater integrated into the car's climate When the additional heater is active there
tion I - any adjustments must therefore be
control system. may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
made before starting the engine.
housing, which is perfectly normal.
Related information
• Engine block heater and passenger compart-
Auto mode or shutdown Passenger compartment heater*
ment heater* (p. 140) If the additional heater is supplemented with a
The additional heater's automatic start sequence
timer function then it can be used as a passen-
can be switched off if required.
ger compartment heater (p. 140).
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven addi-
tional heater should be switched off for short
distances.
6 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
7 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
8 Analogue combined instrument panel.
9 Digital combined instrument panel.
146 * Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Related information
• Engine block heater and passenger compart-
ment heater* (p. 140)
* Option/accessory. 147
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
150
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage compartment
Storage pocket
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
* Option/accessory. 151
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 150)
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and here for example. There are also holders for pens
USB*/AUX input under the armrest. on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. locked* (p. 181) using the key blade (p. 169).
If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 152) are
specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in Related information
the 12 V socket (p. 153) for the front seat, • Storage spaces (p. 150)
and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 150)
• Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ash-
tray* (p. 152)
152 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 414)
Related information
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 386)
1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket. }}
* Option/accessory. 153
LOADING AND STORAGE
154 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to Related information Loading - long load
avoid damaging the upholstery. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 156) To simplify loading (p. 154) in the cargo area,
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets • Safety net* (p. 157) the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The
with straps or web lashings. passenger seat2 backrest can also be folded*
• Loading - long load (p. 155)
for an extra long load.
WARNING • Roof load (p. 156)
Lowering the rear seat backrest
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered, see
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h Seats, rear (p. 85).
(30 mph) carry the impact of an item weigh-
ing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable cur-
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
• Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
* Option/accessory. 155
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Loading (p. 154)
156 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 153)
}}
* Option/accessory. 157
LOADING AND STORAGE
|| WARNING 3. Hook the hook into the load retaining eyelets 4. Hook the hook into the eyelet on the seat rail
on both sides and tension the cam lock by on both sides and tension the cam lock by
Loads in the luggage compartment must be pressing down the tongue and tensioning pressing down the tongue and tensioning
anchored well, and also using a correctly fit- the strap. the strap.
ted safety net.
Front fitting Related information
1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the
Rear fitting • Loading (p. 154)
safety net's storage pockets are turned
1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the • Safety grille* (p. 159)
backwards.
safety net's storage pockets are turned
backwards. 2. Place the seats as far forward as possible.
2. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into 3. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into
the rear roof mounting. the front roof mounting.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side. roof mounting on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining Take care to press forward the net's retaining
hooks for each respective roof mounting's hooks for each respective roof mounting's
front end position. front end position.
158 * Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Safety grille* cargo area is required. However, if desired, the Cargo cover*5
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being safety grille can be dismantled and removed from
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the car.
the event of sudden braking. For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation
instructions4 that were included with the initial
purchase.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be correctly fastened and secured when being
refitted.
Related information
• Safety net* (p. 157)
• Loading (p. 154)
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 156) into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.
Folding up IMPORTANT
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and The protective grille cannot be folded up or
pull back/up. down when the cargo cover is fitted.
IMPORTANT
Attaching the cargo cover
The protective grille cannot be folded up or Move one end piece of the cover into the
down when a cargo cover is fitted. recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
Fitting/removal ponding recess.
The safety grille is normally permanently installed
in the car because it can easily be folded up in
the roof and so be out of the way if a longer
* Option/accessory. 159
LOADING AND STORAGE
Related information
• Loading (p. 154)
• Loading - long load (p. 155)
160
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key All remote control keys have a detachable key Remote control key - losing
Amongst other things, the remote control key is blade (p. 169) made of metal. The visible section If you lose a remote control key then a new one
used for locking/unlocking and starting the is available in two versions so that it is possible to can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
engine. distinguish between the remote control keys. Volvo workshop is recommended.
More remote control keys can be ordered - but
There are two variants of remote control key - The remaining remote control keys must be
not variants other than the one supplied with the
Remote control key in basic version and Remote taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used
control key with PCC (Personal Car missing remote control key must be erased from
for one single car.
Communicator)*. the system as a theft prevention measure.
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
The current number of keys registered to the car
BasicA with can be checked in the menu system MY CAR.
Functionality WARNING
PCCB For a description of the menu system, see MY
If there are children in the car: CAR (p. 115).
Locking/unlocking and
x x Remember to switch off the supply to the
detachable key blade Related information
power windows and sunroof by removing the
Keyless locking/unlock- remote control key if the driver leaves the car. • Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
x
ing
Keyless engine starting x Related information
• Remote control key - functions (p. 166)
Information button and
x
indicator lamps
A 5-button key
B 6-button key
162 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 163
LOCKS AND ALARM
164 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Immobiliser For starting the car, see Starting the engine Remote-controlled immobiliser with
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection (p. 276). tracking system*
system that prevents an unauthorised person Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking sys-
Related information
from starting the car. tem4 makes it possible to track and locate the
• Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system* (p. 165) car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.
Each remote control key (p. 162) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the correct Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more infor-
remote control key with the correct code. mation and assistance with activating the system.
The following error messages in the combined
Related information
instrument panel's information display are related
to the electronic immobiliser: • Remote control key (p. 162)
• Immobiliser (p. 165)
Message Specification
Insert car Error when reading the remote
key control key during starting -
Remove the key from the ignition
switch, press it in again and
make a new start attempt.
Car key Error reading the remote control
not found key during starting - Try to start
again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote key into the ignition
switch and try to start again.
Immobi- Error in immobiliser system dur-
liser Try ing starting. If the error persists:
to start Contact a workshop - an author-
again ised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
* Option/accessory. 165
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key - functions Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate
The remote control key in basic version has while the alarm is deactivated.
functions such as locking and unlocking the Press and hold to open all windows simultane-
doors. ously. For more information, see Global opening
Functions (p. 180).
The function can be changed from unlocking all
doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's
door only with one press of the button and, after
a further press of the button - within ten seconds
- unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu system
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
Communicator).
see MY CAR (p. 115).
Information
Approach light duration – Used to switch
Function buttons on the car's lighting at a distance. For more infor-
mation, see Approach lighting (p. 102).
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
Remote control key in basic version.
while the alarm is activated. Tailgate (p. 181) - Unlocks and disarms
Locking the alarm for the tailgate only.
Press and hold to close all the windows and sun-
Unlocking roof* simultaneously. For more information, see Panic function – Used to attract attention
Global opening (p. 180). in an emergency.
Approach light duration
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds
Tailgate WARNING
or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the
If the sunroof and windows are closed using direction indicators and the horn.
Panic function the remote control key, check that nobody's
hands are trapped. The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least 5 sec-
onds. Otherwise the function switches off auto-
matically after approx. 3 minutes.
166 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information Remote control key - range Remote control key with PCC* -
• Remote control key (p. 162) Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- unique functions
• Remote control key with PCC* - unique func- sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from A remote control key with PCC (Personal Car
tions (p. 167) the car. Communicator) has enhanced functionality com-
pared with a remote control key in basic version
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside If the car does not verify a button being pressed - (p. 162) in the form of an information button and
(p. 178) move closer and try again. indicator lamps.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key blade
(p. 170).
}}
* Option/accessory. 167
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates Green continuous light – the car is locked. The information button function may be dis-
with repeated use of the information button rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
Yellow continuous light – the car is unlocked.
and in different locations (as well as after 7 topographical conditions, etc.
seconds and after the light has travelled Red continuous light – the alarm has been
around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an triggered since the car was locked. Outside the remote control key's range
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If the remote control key is too far away from the
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator
lamps – The alarm was triggered less than 5 car for the information to be read then the status
Indicator lamps display information in accordance minutes ago. the car was last left in is shown, without the light
with the following illustration: in the indicator lamps travelling around on the
Related information remote control key.
• Remote control key with PCC* - range
If several remote control keys are used for the
(p. 168)
car then it is only the one last used for locking/
unlocking that shows the correct status.
168 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory. 169
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
170 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
G017870
Active locks for remote control key, without key blade
and privacy locking activated. Activating privacy locking.
This means that the remote control key without To activate privacy locking:
key blade can only be used to activate/deactivate
the alarm (p. 185), to unlock the doors and to Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl-
start the car. inder.
The remote control key without key blade can Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.
G017869
}}
* Option/accessory. 171
LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
172
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 173
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - remote control key or II (p. 82) is active, and if all doors are closed, Keyless drive* - secure handling of
range then a warning message is shown in the informa- the remote control key
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automati- tion display in the combined instrument panel It is important to handle the car's remote control
cally without pressing a button on the remote and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same keys with great care.
control key7, a remote control key must be within time.
approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or When the remote control key has been returned If one of the remote control keys8 has been left
tailgate. to the car, the warning message goes off and the in the car then the keyless functions are deacti-
audible reminder ceases once either/or: vated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door remote control key that belongs to the car. This
must have the remote control key with him or her. • a door has been opened and closed prevents unauthorised entry.
It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the • the remote control key has been inserted in The next time the car is unlocked with the other
remote control key is on the opposite side of the the ignition switch remote control key the forgotten remote control
car.
• The OK button has been pressed. key is reactivated again.
Related information
IMPORTANT
• Keyless drive* (p. 173)
Avoid leaving the remote control key with
• Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 177)
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into
your car and takes the remote control key, it
will e.g. be possible to start the car by press-
ing the remote control key in the ignition
switch and then pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 173)
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position I
174 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless Drive* - interference to Keyless Drive* - locking All doors and the tailgate must be closed before
remote control key function Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys- the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- tem have a touch-sensitive area on the outside locked.
fere with the remote control key's keyless func- handle of the doors and a rubberised button
tions (p. 173). next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate NOTE
for locking/unlocking. In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the
NOTE gear selector must be set to the P position;
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile otherwise the car can be neither locked nor
phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 alarmed.
cm.
Related information
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use • Keyless drive* (p. 173)
the remote control key and the key blade like a
• Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
remote control key in basic version, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 166).
Related information
• Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172) The touch-sensitive area on the outer door handles and
• Keyless drive* - secure handling of the the rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate.
remote control key (p. 174)
Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long
• Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174) press on any of the door handles' touch-sensitive
areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two
rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 164) in
the windscreen confirms that locking has been
completed by starting to flash.
* Option/accessory. 175
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless drive* - unlocking Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the 2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a key blade and unlock the door.
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure If central locking cannot be unlocked with the 3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
normal. charged, then the left-hand front door can be NOTE
opened using the detachable key blade.
NOTE When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
The door handles normally register a hand gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
that takes hold of the handle, but with thick in the ignition switch, see Alarm* - remote
gloves on or after a very quick hand move- control key not working (p. 187).
ment a second attempt may be required, or
with the glove taken off.
Related information
Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 173)
• Keyless drive* (p. 173) • Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 169)
• Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 175)
• Alarm* (p. 185)
176 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 177
LOCKS AND ALARM
178 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
The door is blocked against opening from Locking/unlocking - from the inside A long press also opens all the side windows*
the outside. All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or simultaneously (see also Global opening
The door can be opened from both the out- unlocked simultaneously using the central lock- (p. 180)).
side and the inside. ing button on the driver's door and passenger • Pull the door handle and open the door - the
door*. door is unlocked and opened in one opera-
NOTE Central locking
tion.
• A door's knob control only locks that par- Lamp in lock button
ticular door - not all doors simultaneously. Central locking is available in two variants - the
• A manually locked rear door with an acti- lamp in the central locking button for the driver's
vated manual child safety lock cannot be door has different meanings dependent on the
opened from either the outside or the variant.
inside, see Child safety locks - manual
With central locking button only in the driver's
activation (p. 184). A rear door that is
door, other doors have no button:
locked in this way can only be unlocked
with the remote control key or central • Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locking button. locked.
With central locking button on both front doors
Related information and electric lock button in each rear door:
Central locking.
• Remote control key - replacing the battery • Illuminated lamp means that only that partic-
(p. 172) • Press one side of the button to lock - ular door is locked. When all buttons are illu-
the other side to unlock. minated all doors are locked.
Press and hold the button to also open all Locking
side windows simultaneously*. • Press the central locking button - all
closed doors are locked.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two A long press also closes all side windows and
different ways: sunroof simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 180)).
• Press the central locking button .
}}
* Option/accessory. 179
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Lock button* rear doors • Remote control key - functions (p. 166) Global opening
The global opening function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be used
for example to quickly air the car during hot
weather.
Related information
• Power windows (p. 105)
180 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory. 181
LOCKS AND ALARM
|| IMPORTANT movement sensors and the sensors for opening Locking with the remote control key
the tailgate are disconnected. – Press the remote control key's button for
• Minimal force is required to release the
locking , see Remote control key - func-
rear hatch lock - just gently press the The doors remain locked and armed.
tions (p. 166).
rubberised panel. • The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed -
press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate > The lock indicator on the instrument panel
• Do not place the lift force on the rubber
starts flashing, which means that the car
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift under the outer handle and lift the tailgate.
is locked and the alarm* has been acti-
the handle. Using too much force may If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes vated.
damage the electrical contacts on the then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
rubber panel. Related information
Unlocking the car from inside
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Unlocking with the remote control key • Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
Unlocking, tailgate
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and To unlock the tailgate:
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
– Press the button (1) on the headlamp control
remote control key's button. panel.
The lock indicator (p. 164) on the instrument > The tailgate is unlocked and can be
panel stops flashing in order to show that not all opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and locked from the inside).
182 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Related information
If a door is opened within the delay time then • Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is (p. 176)
deactivated.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross. • Remote control key (p. 162)
MY CAR
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is acti- OK MENU
vated. The front left door can also be unlocked
with the detachable key blade (p. 169). In addi- TUNE knob control
tion, it is possible to unlock and open the doors
and tailgate on cars equipped with keyless start EXIT
and lock system* by touching door handles or the If someone is going to stay in the car but the
handle on the tailgate. doors must be locked from the outside, then the
deadlocks function can be temporarily switched
WARNING off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- For a description of the menu system, see MY
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to CAR (p. 115).
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
* Option/accessory. 183
LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
• Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 184)
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- • Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
ual door lock (p. 178).
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside
The child safety locks are located on the trailing (p. 178)
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
– Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade (p. 169) to turn the knob. Control panel driver's door.
The door is blocked against opening from 1. Start the engine or choose a key position
the inside. higher than 0.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
184 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory. 185
LOCKS AND ALARM
186 * Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm* - remote control key not Alarm signals* Reduced alarm level*
working When the alarm (p. 185) is triggered a siren Reduced guard means that the movement and
If the alarm (p. 185) cannot be deactivated with sounds and all direction indicators flash. tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery
(p. 172) is discharged - the car can be • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as alarm is switched off. The siren has its own (p. 185) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
follows: battery and works independently of the car during transport on a car train or car ferry - tem-
battery. porarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec-
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes tors.
key blade (p. 176). or until the alarm is switched off. The procedure is the same as with the temporary
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator disengaging of deadlocks (p. 183)11.
(p. 186) flashes rapidly and the siren
sounds. Related information
• Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
* Option/accessory. 187
LOCKS AND ALARM
Korea
188
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
190 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory. 191
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1 Electronic stability control (ESC) - Sport mode is indicated in the com-
Trailer stability assist (p. 325) function is to sta- operation bined instrument panel by means of
bilise the car and trailer combination if it begins this symbol illuminating with a constant
to snake. For more information, see Driving with a Selection of level - Sport mode glow until the driver deselects the
trailer* (p. 318). The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be function or until the engine is switched off - after
deactivated. the next time the engine is started the ESC sys-
tem is back in its normal mode again.
NOTE However, the driver can select
The function is deactivated if the driver the Sport mode, which allows Related information
selects Sport mode. for a more active driving experi- • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
ence. (p. 191)
Related information Sport mode is selected in the • Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
menu system MY CAR. For a and messages (p. 193)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 192) description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 193) In Sport mode the system detects whether the
accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and
cornering are more active than in normal driving
and then allows controlled skidding with the rear
section up to a certain level before it intervenes
and stabilises the car.
If, for example, the driver stops a controlled skid
by releasing the accelerator pedal, then the ESC
system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
192 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Table
Symbol Message Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated
automatically when the brakes have cooled.
and
}}
193
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 191)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 192)
194
DRIVER SUPPORT
While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button to switch
on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired high-
est possible speed: Press one of the steering
wheel buttons or until the combined
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel. instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed selected max. speed is stored in the
is resumed. memory.
Standby mode. When stationary
Activate and adjust the max. speed. 1. Press the steering wheel button to switch
on the speed limiter.
Selected speed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 195
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2. Scroll with the button until the combined Speed limiter* - changing speed Speed limiter* - temporary
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the deactivation and standby mode
desired maximum speed. Changing the stored speed A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
> The speed limiter is then active and the Stored max. speed is changed with short or long ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
selected max. speed is stored in the presses on the or steering wheel button. lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
memory. is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph): selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Related information
• Use short presses - each press gives
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
• Speed limiter* (p. 195) +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph): set it in standby mode:
• Hold down the button and release it at the – Press .
required max. speed.
> The mark (5) in the combined instrument
Last press made is stored in the memory. panel changes colour from GREEN to
WHITE and the driver can temporarily
Related information
exceed the set maximum speed.
• Speed limiter* (p. 195)
The speed limiter is reactivated with one
press on . The mark (5) then changes
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the
car's maximum speed is limited once
again.
196 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
– Depress the accelerator pedal fully. Speed limiter* - alarm for speed Speed limiter* - deactivation
> The combined instrument panel shows exceeded A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar-
the stored maximum speed with a col- A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu-
oured mark (5) and the driver can tempo- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
rarily exceed the set maximum speed - lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
the mark (5) changes colour during this is prevented by the speed limiter from acciden- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
time from GREEN to WHITE. tally exceeding a speed that is selected/set in
advance. To deactivate the speed limiter:
The speed limiter is automatically reacti-
vated after the release of the accelerator – Press the steering wheel button .
On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's
pedal and the car's speed is slowed down engine braking effect may be inadequate and the > The combined instrument panel's symbol
to below the selected/stored maximum selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver for speed limiter (6) and the selection of
speed - the display's mark (5) changes is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. the set speed (5) both extinguish - the
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the set/stored speed is thus cleared and can-
car's maximum speed is again limited. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to
below the selected maximum speed. not then be resumed with the button.
Related information The driver can then use the accelerator
• Speed limiter* (p. 195) NOTE pedal to choose a speed without limita-
• Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195) The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if tion.
the speed has been exceeded by at least
• Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither
Related information
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197) of the or buttons has been depressed
• Speed limiter* (p. 195)
• Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded during the last half minute. • Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
(p. 197) • Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
Related information standby mode (p. 196)
• Speed limiter* (p. 195) • Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
• Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
• Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
• Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
* Option/accessory. 197
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument standby mode (p. 199)
panel in cars with speed limiter2.
• Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
Cruise control - On/Off.
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
is resumed.
Standby mode.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars without speed limiter2. Activate and adjust the speed.
2 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
198 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control* - managing speed To adjust 5 km/h (5 mph): Cruise control* temporary
It is possible to activate, set and change the • Use short presses - each press gives 5 km/h deactivation and standby mode
stored speed. (5 mph). The function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Activating and setting the speed To adjust 1 km/h (1 mph):
To start the cruise control: • Hold down the button and release it at the Temporary deactivation - standby mode
required speed. To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it
• Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE
in standby mode:
(without speed limiter) or (with speed Last press made is stored in the memory.
limiter). If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal • Press the steering wheel button .
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- prior to pressing the / button, then it is the > The combined instrument panel's
bined instrument panel illuminates - cruise car's current speed when the button is pressed marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
control is in standby mode. that is stored. from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is tem-
To activate cruise control: porarily disengaged.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
• At the required speed - press the steering tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect Standby mode due to driver
wheel button or . the cruise control setting - the car returns to the intervention
last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
> The current speed is stored in memory and released.
the combined instrument panel's marking (5) automatically set in standby mode if:
illuminates at the selected speed and the
NOTE • the foot brake is used
symbol (6) changes from GREY to WHITE -
the car then follows the stored speed. If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than
1 minute3
depressed for several minutes then it is
NOTE blocked and deactivated. To be able to reacti- • the gear lever/selector is moved to N posi-
vate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped tion
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
and the engine restarted. • the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
Related information The driver must then regulate the speed.
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long • Cruise control* (p. 198) A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
presses on the or steering wheel button. tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
3 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. }}
* Option/accessory. 199
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| the setting - the car returns to the last stored Cruise control* - resume set speed Cruise control* - deactivate
speed when the accelerator pedal is released. The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set After temporary deactivation and standby Cruise control is switched off with the steering
in standby mode if: mode (p. 199) it is possible to resume the set wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine -
speed. the set/stored speed is thus cleared and cannot
• wheels lose traction
then be resumed with the button.
• engine speed is too low/high To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode: Related information
• speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then regulate the speed. • Press the steering wheel button . • Cruise control* (p. 198)
> The combined instrument panel's • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
Related information marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour • Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
• Cruise control* (p. 198) from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows standby mode (p. 199)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199) the last stored speed. • Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200) NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by selecting the
button.
Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 198)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
200 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Operation
4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
* Option/accessory. 201
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can Distance Warning* - limitations Related information
be selected and shown in the combined instru- • Distance Warning* (p. 201)
ment panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more This function, which uses the same radar sensor
lines the longer the time interval. One line corre- as Adaptive cruise control (p. 204) and Collision
• Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 203)
sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle warning with auto brake (p. 229), has certain lim-
in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds. itations.
The same symbol is also shown when Adaptive
cruise control (p. 205) is activated. NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
NOTE tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun-
glasses, could mean that the warning light in
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
the windscreen cannot be seen.
ted distance in metres for a given time inter-
val. Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
The set time interval is also used by the func-
in front.
tion adaptive cruise control (p. 205).
The size of other vehicles could also affect
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
traffic regulations.
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates
at a shorter distance than the setting or that
Related information the warning is temporarily absent.
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
• Distance Warning* - symbols and messages lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
(p. 203) that set due to limitations in sensor range.
202 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning* - symbols and panel if the function is reduced due to its limita-
messages tions.
Related information
• Distance Warning* (p. 201)
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
* Option/accessory. 203
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 211) function.
204 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - function WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise con- vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- the driver set for time interval (p. 209). If the
trol system and a coordinated spacing system. ance system. The driver must intervene if the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
Function overview the car will instead maintain the speed set and
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for stored by the driver. This also takes place if the
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low speed.
trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles
and objects. The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc- sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water herself. This applies with large differences in
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 217)
roads. braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 209) is meas-
Function overview5. ured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 217). The follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h6
cruise control function regulates the speed with (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the
Warning lamp - braking by driver required speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
Steering wheel keypad (p. 206) brakes to emit a low sound when they are being engine speed becomes too low, the cruise con-
used by the adaptive cruise control. trol is set in standby mode (p. 209) at which
Radar sensor (p. 217) automatic braking ceases - the driver must then
take over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis-
WARNING tance to the vehicle in front.
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot
beneath the brake pedal - it may then
become trapped.
5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
6 Queue Assist (p. 211) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph). }}
* Option/accessory. 205
DRIVER SUPPORT
7 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
206 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = Time distance Adaptive cruise control* - managing
standby mode). speed
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
Time distance = standby mode).
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
Related information
= standby mode).
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control without Speed • Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
limiter • Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
* Option/accessory. 207
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • Press the steering wheel button - a simi- At the same time a speed the setting - the car returns to the last stored
lar WHITE symbol illuminates in the com- range is marked: speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
bined instrument panel (8) which shows that
the adaptive cruise control is in standby NOTE
mode (p. 209).
If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons
To activate ACC: are held depressed for several minutes then
• At the required speed - press the steering • the higher speed with GREEN marking is the the function is blocked and deactivated. To be
pre-programmed speed able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped
wheel button or .
and the engine restarted.
> The current speed is stored in the memory, • the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle
in front. In certain situations it cannot be reactivated -
the combined instrument panel shows a
"magnifying glass" (6) around the stored in which case, the combined instrument panel
Changing the stored speed (p. 215) shows Adaptive cruise control
speed for a second or so and its marking Stored speed is changed with short or long
changes from WHITE to GREEN. unavailable.
presses on the or steering wheel button.
When this symbol changes colour from
WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is active To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph): Related information
and the car maintains the stored • Use short presses - each press gives • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
speed. +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). • Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Only when the symbol shows To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph): • Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
an image of another vehicle is
• Hold down the button and release it at the
the distance to the vehicle in required speed.
front controlled by the ACC.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
prior to pressing the / button, then it is the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
9 An explanation of the illustration's figures is given in the section "Adaptive cruise control - overview" (p. 206).
208 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - set time NOTE Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
interval deactivation, and standby mode
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily
traffic regulations.
Different time intervals to the deactivated and set in standby mode.
vehicle in front can be selected If the adaptive cruise control does not appear
and shown in the combined to react when activated, this may be because Temporary deactivation/standby mode
instrument panel as 1-5 hori- the time distance to the vehicle in front is pre- - with speed limiter
zontal lines - the more lines the venting an increase in speed. To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
longer the time interval. One control and set it in standby mode:
The higher the speed the longer the calcula-
line corresponds to approximately 1 second to ted distance in metres for a given time inter- • Press the steering wheel button
the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately val.
3 seconds. This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
To set/change the time distance: Read more how speed is handled (p. 207). GREEN to WHITE.
• Turn the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
Related information Temporary deactivation/standby mode
keypad (p. 206) (or use the / buttons • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204) - without speed limiter
for cars without Speed limiter).
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206) To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
At low speed, when the distances are short, the control and set it in standby mode:
adaptive cruise control increases the time interval • Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
slightly. • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211) • Press the steering wheel button
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- Standby mode due to driver
val to vary noticeably in certain situations in order intervention
to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disen-
smoothly and comfortably. gaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance
Warning (p. 201) function is activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 209
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • the foot brake is used • engine speed is too low/high Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than • speed has fallen below 30 km/h11 (20 mph) another vehicle
1 minute10 • wheels lose traction When the car is following another vehicle and the
• the gear selector is moved to N position • brake temperature is high driver indicates an impending overtaking
(automatic gearbox) manoeuvre with the direction indicator12, the
• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow
• the driver maintains speed higher than the or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate
stored speed for longer than 1 minute. the car towards the vehicle in front.
The driver must then regulate the speed. Resume set speed The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reacti-
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- (43 mph).
vated with one press on the steering wheel but-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
ton - the speed is then set to the last stored WARNING
speed. Be aware that this function can be activated
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
in more situations other than during overtak-
Automatic standby mode NOTE ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on indicate a change of lane or exit to another
A pronounced increase in speed may occur road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 191). after the cruise control has been reactivated
If any of these systems stops working, the adap-
tive cruise control is deactivated automatically. with the button. Related information
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
sound and the message Adaptive cruise Related information • Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
control cancelled is shown in the combined • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
• Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
instrument panel. The driver must then intervene • Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle • Cruise control* (p. 198)
ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
• the driver opens the door
• the driver takes off his seatbelt
10 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
11 Does not apply to a car with Queue assistance - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
210 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise
assistance control can follow another vehicle within the
Keypad with Speed limiter Queue assistance also provides the adaptive range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
The adaptive cruise control is switched off with cruise control with enhanced functionality at
the steering wheel button in the steering speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph). NOTE
wheel keypad (p. 206) - the set/stored speed is A vehicle in front must be within a reasonable
thus cleared and cannot then be resumed with In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the queue distance in order to enable activation of the
the button. adaptive cruise control at a speed lower than
assistance function (also referred to as "Queue
Assist"). 30 km/h (20 mph).
Keypad without Speed limiter
With a short press on the steering wheel button Queue assistance has the following functions:
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
the adaptive cruise control is set in standby
mode (p. 209). It is switched off with an addi-
• Extended speed range - also at lower than slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
tional short press - the set/stored speed is thus
• Change of target 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
cleared and cannot then be resumed with the front starts moving again then the Adaptive
button. • Automatic braking ceases when stationary
cruise control is set in standby mode with auto-
Related information
• Automatic activation parking brake. matic braking. The driver must then reactivate it
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the in one of the following ways:
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
• Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205) • Press the steering wheel button
even though it is capable of following another
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than ...or...
sages (p. 215) 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. • Depress the accelerator pedal.
Extended speed range > The adaptive cruise control will then resume
following the vehicle in front.
NOTE
In order to activate the adaptive cruise control,
the driver's door must be closed and the
driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
* Option/accessory. 211
DRIVER SUPPORT
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there • when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
may be stationary traffic in front. and the vehicle in front turns off so the adap- seatbelt
When the adaptive cruise control is following
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to • ESC is changed from Normal to Sport
follow. mode
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov- Termination of automatic braking at a • Queue assistance has held the car stationary
ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive for more than 4 minutes
standstill
cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle. • the engine is switched off
In certain situations, queue assistance stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means that • the brakes have overheated.
the brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
212
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information Adaptive cruise control* - switch Changing back from CC to ACC
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204) cruise control functionality Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on the
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206) button in accordance with the deactivation
Changing from ACC to CC instructions (p. 211). The next time the system is
• Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205) A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that
combined instrument panel: is activated.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after
switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows
the set speed.
* Option/accessory. 213
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - fault means that the adaptive cruise control's radar The following table presents examples of possi-
tracing and action sensor (p. 217) cannot detect other vehicles in ble causes for a message being shown along
front of the car. with the appropriate action:
If the combined instrument panel shows the mes-
This message indicates that neither of the func-
sage Radar blocked See manual then it
tions for Distance Alert (p. 201) or Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) are working.
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road sur-
signals. face.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
• Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
214 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Set ESC to Normal to The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 191) has been set in Normal
enable Cruise mode.
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
cancelled
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
unavailable This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See man- The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
ual
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 213) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides informa-
tion on appropriate alternatives.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
}}
* Option/accessory. 215
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
• Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
216 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT NOTE
In the event of visible damage to the car's Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
may be damaged: (p. 233).
Related information
• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
•
}}
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
* Option/accessory. 217
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING WARNING
The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid-
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene ance system. The driver must intervene if the
when the adaptive cruise control is not main- system does not detect a vehicle in front.
taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
traffic, weather and road conditions. such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
Read all the sections about the adaptive
objects.
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
driver should be aware before it is used. example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc-
tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
The driver always bears responsibility for
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
even when the adaptive cruise control is
roads.
being used.
218 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓ Modelo: L2C0038TR
1071-10-3451
Brazil
EAN: 07897843800248
Modelo: L2C0055TR
✓ 1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
Europe ✓ ✓ 1999/5/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
TRA
✓ REGISTERED No: 0018923/09
219
DRIVER SUPPORT
✓ 14785/POSTEL/2010 1982
Indonesia
✓ 38806/SDPPI/2015 4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87
✓
Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
DPH-L2C0038TR
Korea
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
✓ Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009
Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
Moldavia ✓ ✓ 1024
220
DRIVER SUPPORT
TA-2009/163
✓
APPROVED
South Africa
TA-2014/2390
✓
APPROVED
✓ CCAB09LP4590T3
Taiwan
✓ CCAB15LP0680T0
Related information
• Radar sensor (p. 217)
221
DRIVER SUPPORT
222 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - function may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain City Safety™ - operation
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car full brake force, the driver must depress the City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the brake pedal and this could then make it possible to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of colli- to avoid a collision, even at speed differences amongst other things, when changes in the traf-
sion, City Safety will automatically brake the car, above 15 km/h (9 mph). fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
which may be experienced as heavy braking. When the function is activated and brakes, the could lead to an incident.
combined instrument panel shows a text mes-
sage to the effect that the function is/has been On and Off
active.
NOTE
NOTE The City Safety™ function is activated auto-
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake lights matically when the engine is started.
come on.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
Related information City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
• City Safety™ (p. 222) City Safety™ handled in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 115) and after starting the engine the
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window13. • City Safety™ - operation (p. 223) function can be deactivated as follows:
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph) • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
• Search in MY CAR for Driver support
in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages system and select the Off option at City
can completely avoid a collision. (p. 228) Safety.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- However, the function will be enabled the
dure and stops the car in normal circumstances, next time the engine is started, regardless of
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers whether the system was enabled or disabled
this is well outside normal driving style and may when the engine was switched off.
be experienced as being uncomfortable.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is
greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety
13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}
223
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| WARNING City Safety™ - limitations When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect temporarily deactivated.
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually. cars and other large vehicles in front of the car City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below
irrespective of whether it is day or night. 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does
However, the function does have some limita- not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front
Related information is being approached very slowly, e.g. when park-
• City Safety™ (p. 222) tions.
ing.
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224) The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
• City Safety™ - function (p. 223) has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
why City Safety does not intervene in situations
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226) white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on
where the driver is steering or accelerating in a
clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages the windscreen may also disrupt the function.
(p. 228) When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
stationary object the car remains stationary for a
• MY CAR (p. 115) jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
net limit the function.
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety the vehicle in front.
measures how the light is reflected. The sensor
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity.
when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the
The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate
beforehand.
and rear light reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the
ABS14 and ESC15 systems will provide best pos-
sible braking force with maintained stability.
224
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
225
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information City Safety™ - laser sensor The lower label in the figure describes the laser
• City Safety™ (p. 222) The City Safety™ function includes a sensor beam's physical data:
• City Safety™ - function (p. 223) which transmits laser light (see illustration • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
(p. 223) for sensor location). Contact a qualified with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand-
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser ards for laser product design with the excep-
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo tion of deviations in accordance with "Laser
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor. Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
The following two labels relate to the laser sen- physical data.
sor:
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x vertical) 28° × 12°
226
DRIVER SUPPORT
227
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - symbols and may illuminate in the combined instrument panel
messages and a text message may be shown. A text mes-
In conjunction with automatic braking by the City sage can be acknowledged by briefly pressing
Safety™ (p. 222) system, one or more symbols the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 224).
City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not operational.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 222)
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
228
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in • Collision warning system* - limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist two variants: (p. 235)
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the Level 1 • Collision warning system* - camera sensor
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a The driver is merely warned16 of occurring obsta- limitations (p. 236)
pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are sta-
tionary or moving in the same direction.
cles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no • Collision warning system* - symbols and
automatic braking intervenes, the driver must messages (p. 238)
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist himself brake.
and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situa- Level 2
tions where the driver should have started brak- The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
ing earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is
in every situation. braked automatically if the driver himself does not
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist act within a reasonable time.
and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be acti-
vated as late as possible in order to avoid unnec- IMPORTANT
essary intervention. Maintenance of the internal components of
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only
or reduce collision speed. be performed at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as
an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving Related information
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warn- • Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
ing with Auto Brake to do the braking, there • Collision warning system* - detection of
might be a risk of a collision sooner or later. pedestrians (p. 232)
Two system levels • Collision warning system* - detection of
Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Col- cyclists (p. 231)
lision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and • Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
* Option/accessory. 229
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - function 1 - Collision warning If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- take evasive action and the risk of collision is
nent collision. imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
The collision warning system can detect pedes-
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
trians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or
takes place with full brake force in order to
moving in the same direction as your car and are
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
located in front of you.
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists,
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, the warning and full brake intervention may come
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is very late or simultaneously.
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support18
Function overview17.
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a activated.
collision risk.
This means that the brake system is prepared for
Radar sensor18 rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which
Camera sensor may feel like a slight jolt.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
three steps in the following order: quickly then full brake function is implemented.
17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
18 With system Level 2 only.
230 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING Collision warning system* - Optimal performance of the system requires that
detection of cyclists the system function that detects a cyclist
The collision warning system does not receives as unambiguous information as possible
engage in all driving situations or traffic, about the body and bicycle contours - this implies
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles or the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms,
cyclists driving in another direction to the car shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined
or to animals. with a normal human pattern of movement.
Warning only activated in the event of a high If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
risk for collision. This section "Function" and not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
the section "Limitations" inform about limita- tem cannot detect a cyclist.
tions that the driver must be aware of before
using the Collision Warning system with Auto
Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes-
trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph). The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are
Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- travelling in the same direction.
trians and cyclists do not work in darkness
and tunnels - not even when streetlights are
lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a colli-
sion or reduce collision speed. To ensure full
brake performance, the driver should always
depress the brake pedal - even when the car
auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is
always responsible that the correct distance
and speed are maintained - even when the
collision warning system with auto-brake is
used.
Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a
cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly
Related information from behind and in the car's centre line.
• Collision warning system* (p. 229)
}}
* Option/accessory. 231
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| • For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, WARNING Collision warning system* -
he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult detection of pedestrians
bicycle". Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist
Detection is a means of assistance.
• The bicycle must be equipped with a highly
The function cannot detect:
visible and approved19 rearward-facing red
reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the • all cyclists in all situations and does not
roadway. see partially obscured cyclists, for exam-
ple.
• The function can only detect cyclists directly
from behind and who are travelling in the • cyclists in clothing that obscures the con-
same direction - not at an angle from behind, tours of the body or who are approaching
not from the side. from the side.
• Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand • bicycles that have no rearward-facing red
edge of the car's imagined/extended side reflector.
lines may be detected late or not at all. • bicycles loaded with large objects.
• The function's capacity to detect cyclists at The driver is always responsible that the vehi- Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
dusk and dawn is limited - just like the cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- trians with clear body contours.
human eye. tance adapted to the speed. Optimal performance of the system requires that
• The function's capacity to detect cyclists is the system function that detects pedestrians
deactivated when driving in darkness and Related information receives as unambiguous information as possible
tunnels - even when streetlights are lit. • Collision warning system* (p. 229) about the contours of the body - this implies the
opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders,
• For optimum bicycle detection, the City
legs, upper and lower body combined with a nor-
Safety™ function must be activated, see City
mal human pattern of movement.
Safety™ (p. 222).
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
a pedestrian.
19 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
232 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 233
DRIVER SUPPORT
21 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
234 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - WARNING warning at a later stage, which reduces the total
limitations number of warnings.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
The function has certain limitations - for example, implemented late or not at all if the traffic sit- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily
it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph). uation or external influences mean that the deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
The collision warning system's visual warning sig- pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front cor- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti-
nal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 230)) may be rectly. vated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph),
difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, which is why the system does not intervene in sit-
The sensor system has a limited range for uations where the car is approaching a vehicle in
reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if
pedestrians and cyclists22 - the system can
the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
give effective warnings and brake interven-
ing sound should therefore always be activated. tions for them at vehicle speeds up to In situations where the driver demonstrates
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow- active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warn-
moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- ing may be postponed slightly in order to keep
extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
70 km/h (43 mph).
(p. 191) systems will provide best possible brak- When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with
ing force with maintained stability. Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi-
cles could be disengaged due to darkness or a stationary object the car remains stationary for
poor visibility. a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked
NOTE Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
The visual warning signal can be temporarily trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
disengaged in the event of high passenger speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). the vehicle in front.
compartment temperature caused by strong On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
sunlight for example. If this occurs then the The collision warning system uses the same when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the
warning sound is activated even if it is deacti- radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
vated in the menu system. (p. 204). Read more about radar sensor limita- beforehand.
• Warnings may not appear if the distance tions (p. 217).
Related information
to the vehicle in front is small or if steer- If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
ing wheel and pedal movements are
• Collision warning system* (p. 229)
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
large, e.g. a very active driving style. reduced (p. 233). This would lead to the system
22 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
* Option/accessory. 235
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - camera The camera sensors have limitations similar to • Active main beam
sensor limitations the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, • Driver Alert Control
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for exam-
ple. Under such conditions the functions of cam- • Lane Keeping Aid
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a era-dependent systems could be significantly • Road sign information
pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are reduced or temporarily disengaged. The following table presents possible causes for
stationary or moving in the same direction. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- a message being shown along with the appropri-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road ate action.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations. surfaces or unclear lane markings could also sig-
nificantly reduce camera sensor function when it Cause Action
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well as is used to scan the carriageway and detect
by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the pedestrians and other vehicles. The windscreen sur- Clean the windscreen
functions: face in front of the surface in front of the
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, camera is dirty or cov- camera from dirt, ice
• Active main beam (p. 94) which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles ered with ice or snow. and snow.
• Road sign information (p. 244) cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated. Thick fog, heavy rain No action. At times
• Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 249) or snow means that the camera does not
During very high temperatures the camera is
• Lane assistance (p. 252)
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
the camera does not work during heavy rain
work sufficiently well. or snowfall.
after the engine is started in order to protect
NOTE camera functionality. The windscreen sur- Wait. It may take sev-
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the face in front of the eral minutes for the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and Fault tracing and action camera has been camera to measure
dirt. If the display shows the message Windscreen cleaned but the mes- the visibility.
sensors blocked See manual then this means sage remains.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot
screen in front of the camera sensor as this detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or markings in front of the car. between the inside of have the windscreen
more of the systems dependent on the cam- the windscreen and inside the camera
era to stop working. At the same time, this means that - besides Colli- the camera. cover cleaned - an
sion Warning with Auto Brake - the following authorised Volvo
functions will not have full functionality either: workshop is recom-
mended.
236 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 229)
* Option/accessory. 237
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - symbols driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
and messages pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist stationary or moving in the same direction.
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
238 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Collision warning Serv- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
ice required
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 229)
• Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
• Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 232)
• Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 231)
• Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
• Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 235)
• Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 236)
* Option/accessory. 239
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS* Overview
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function
designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev-
eral lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not NOTE • BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
work in all situations.
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car • CTA* (p. 242)
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style where the system has detected the vehicle. If
and the use of rearview and door mirrors. the car is overtaken on both sides at the
BLIS can never replace the driver's responsi- same time then both lamps illuminate.
bility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to change lanes in a safe man-
ner. Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS functions are located
inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of
the car.
23 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
240 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS* - operation When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in • the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function the button extinguishes/illuminates and the com- vehicles
designed for providing support for the driver bined instrument panel confirms the change with • the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up by
when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev- a text message. The door panel indicator lamps another vehicle.
eral lanes in the same direction. flash once upon activation.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
To extinguish the message: quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door
Activate/deactivate BLIS
• Press the left stalk switch OK button. panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This
If the driver activates the direction indicator on
is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door or
the same side as the warning in this situation
panels flashing once.
• Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message extin- then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant
guishes. glow to flashing with a more intense light.
Limitations
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect haz-
Button for activating/deactivating. ards if it is covered.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
by pressing the BLIS button on the centre con- area of the sensors.
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rap-
sole. idly approaching vehicle. • BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
Some combinations of the selected equipment The BLIS function is active at speeds above nected to the car's electrical system.
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre 10 km/h (6 mph).
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 115). The system is designed to react when:
}}
* Option/accessory. 241
DRIVER SUPPORT
242 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind
pedestrians. sector rapidly decreases.
CTA is only active during reversing and is acti- Examples of further limitations:
vated automatically when the gearbox's reverse
position is selected.
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
• If CTA detects something approaching from to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect haz-
the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. ards if it is covered.
The signal comes from either the left or the • CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
right-hand speaker, depending on the direc- nected to the car’s electrical system.
tion from which the object is approaching.
• CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS IMPORTANT
lamps. The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
• An additional warning is provided in the form Blind CTA sector. ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
of an illuminated icon in the display screen's be performed by a workshop - an authorised
PAS graphics (p. 261). Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, Maintenance
but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
cles or obstructing objects. corner of the car.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of
vision" may be limited from the beginning and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
}}
car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-
243
DRIVER SUPPORT
Message examples:
Message Specification
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side. CTA OFF CTA is manually switched off -
BLIS is active.
• To ensure optimal functionality the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean. BLIS and BLIS and CTA are temporarily
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the CTA OFF non-operational because a
area of the sensors. Trailer trailer is connected to the
attached car's electrical system.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 240) BLIS and BLIS and CTA are non-opera-
CTA Service tional.
• BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
required
• Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 240)
244 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
24 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
25 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. }}
* Option/accessory. 245
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Together with the symbol for Following which, the sign information is hidden The speed applicable on an exit
the current speed limit, a sign until the next speed-related sign is detected. is indicated in certain markets
showing that overtaking is pro- by means of an additional sign
hibited may also be displayed Additional signs containing an arrow.
where appropriate.
Speed signs linked to this type
of additional sign are displayed
only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
End of restriction or motorway
A corresponding road sign is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in
situations where RSI detects a sign that involves
the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related
information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Examples of such signs are:
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a spe-
cific distance or at a certain time of day. The driv-
Examples of additional signs25.
er's attention is drawn to the situation by means
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted of a symbol for an additional sign under the sym-
for the same road - an additional sign then indi- bol showing speed.
cates the circumstances under which the differ-
ent speeds apply. The road section may be par- Display of additional information
End of all restrictions. ticularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or
fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
25 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
246
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 247
DRIVER SUPPORT
248 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue, Driver Alert Control (DAC)* -
The DAC function is intended to attract the driv- irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a operation
er's attention when he/she starts to drive less warning. Settings are made from the centre console dis-
consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted play screen and its menu system.
or starts to fall asleep. NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a On/Off
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu- The Driver Alert function can be set in standby
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city lar intervals, and make sure you are well mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 115):
rested.
traffic. • Checked box - function activated.
• Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple:
• in strong side winds
• on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 236).
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of the Related information
road with the driver's steering wheel movements. • Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
the carriageway evenly. (p. 249)
In some cases driving ability is not affected • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may messages (p. 251)
not be any warning issued for the driver. For this
reason it is always important to stop and take a
}}
* Option/accessory. 249
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).
If the vehicle is being driven erratically,
the driver is notified by an acoustic sig-
nal plus the text message Driver Alert
Time for a break - the linked symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument panel
at the same time. The warning is repeated after a
time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a
sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired-
ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dan-
gerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)
250 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - the centre console's display screen in different
symbols and messages situations.
DAC (p. 249) can show symbols and text mes- Here are some examples:
sages on the combined instrument panel or in
Driver Alert Time for a break The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 249)
* Option/accessory. 251
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* Principle for LDW If the car crosses one of the side lines the driver
The purpose of Lane Departure Warning (Lane is alerted with an acoustic signal or vibration in
Departure Warning) is to help the driver to the steering wheel. Steering wheel vibration var-
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving ies - the longer the time for which the car has
its own lane in certain situations on motorways crossed the side line, the longer the vibration.
and similar major routes.
NOTE
Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA
There are two versions of Lane assistance: The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
• LDW - Lane Departure Warning - alerts alarm when there is a line between the car's
the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration wheels.
in the steering wheel.
• LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.) WARNING
(Lane Keeping Aid) - steers the car back into
its lane and/or alerts the driver with an A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane. Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
acoustic signal or vibration in the steering does not engage in all driving situations or
wheel. traffic, weather or road conditions.
The car is supplied with one of these two sys- The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
tems - market and engine alternative determine
and that applicable laws and road traffic regu-
which of the systems the car is equipped with. lations are followed.
In the event of uncertainty whether the car has
LDW or LKA: Related information
• Open the menu system MY CAR and locate • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
Driver support system - which specifies (p. 253)
Lane Departure Warning if the car has • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation
LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA. (p. 254)
Warning with steering wheel vibration27. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 254)
252 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - Select from the options:
and messages (p. 255) function • On at startup - The function is set in
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256) Certain settings can be made for the Lane standby mode each time the engine is
Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning) started. Otherwise the same value as when
• Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
function. the engine was switched off is obtained.
Off & On • Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 115).
* Option/accessory. 253
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - • The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
operation function is in standby mode because the limitations
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure speed is below 65 km/h (40 mph). Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure
Warning) is complemented in the combined • The LDW symbol has no side lines - the Warning) camera sensor has limitations in a sim-
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in differ- function is deactivated. ilar way to the human eye.
ent situations. Here are some examples:
Related information For more information, read about camera sensor
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252) limitations (p. 236).
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW does
not give any warning, such as:
• Direction indicators are switched on
• The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal28
• In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal28
LDW function side lines. • In the event of rapid steering wheel
• The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines - the movements28
function is active and detects/"sees" one • If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
side line, or both.
• The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the Related information
function is active but detects neither left nor • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
right side line.
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
or
28 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 253).
254 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - bined instrument panel in combination with an Message examples:
symbols and messages explanatory message - follow the recommenda-
In situations where there is no Lane assistance tion given if appropriate.
function, a symbol may be shown in the com-
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
* Option/accessory. 255
DRIVER SUPPORT
256 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function CAR. For a description of the menu system, see If the car approaches the left or right side line of
Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keep- MY CAR (p. 115). the lane and the direction indicator is not acti-
ing Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function. vated, the car is steered back into the lane.
In addition, the following selections can be made
in MY CAR: Warning with vibration in steering wheel
Off & On
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed • Warning with vibration in the steering wheel:
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with Vibration only - On or Off.
clearly visible side lines. The function is temporar- • Active steering: Steering assist only- On or
ily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 Off.
metres between the lane's side lines.
• Both Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel and Active steering: Full function -
On or Off.
Active steering
Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within
the side lines for the lane.
257
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as
the direction indicator is switched on.
258 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations standby mode and will remain in this mode until
Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) camera the driver begins to steer the car again.
sensor has limitations in a similar way to the
Related information
human eye.
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
For more information, read about camera sensor • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
limitations (p. 236) and see Collision warning
system* - operation (p. 233).
NOTE
In certain demanding situations Lane assis-
tance may have difficulty assisting the driver
in the right way - in which case it is recom-
mended to deactivate the function.
Examples of such situations may be:
• roadworks
• winter road conditions
• poor road surface
• very sporty driving style
• poor weather with reduced visibility.
* Option/accessory. 259
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols bined instrument panel in combination with an Message examples:
and messages explanatory message - follow the recommenda-
In situations where there is no Lane assistance tion given if appropriate.
function, a symbol may be shown in the com-
Lane Keeping Aid Inter- LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.
rupted
Related information
• Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)
260 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 261
DRIVER SUPPORT
262 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE Park assist syst* - forward (7 mph) or above - the function is reactivated
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. when the speed falls below 10 km/h (6 mph).
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
centre console's screen indicate distance to
NOTE
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
detected obstacles. Parking assistance is deactivated when the
be switched off manually in order that the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
sensors do not react to them. The parking assistance system is automatically selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
activated when the engine is started - the
Related information switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
• Park Assist* (p. 261) assistance is switched off with the button, the IMPORTANT
lamp goes out. When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263) auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors obstacle.
(p. 264)
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264) Related information
• Park assist camera* (p. 265) • Park Assist* (p. 261)
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 264)
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)
The distance covered in front of the car is about
• Park assist camera* (p. 265)
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
The front parking assistance system is active up
to 10 km/h (6 mph).
If the Parking Assistance System is deactivated
because the car is moving too quickly - 11 km/h
* Option/accessory. 263
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist syst* - fault indication Park assist syst* - cleaning the
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. sensors
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
centre console's screen indicate the distance to An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
the detected obstacle. centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
constant glow and the text message that they work properly. Clean them with water
Park Assist System Service required is and car shampoo.
shown then parking assistance is disengaged.
264 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera* Function and operation When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which is lines are shown graphically which illustrate where
activated when the reverse gear is selected. the car's rear wheels will roll with the current
steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel
The camera image is shown on the centre con- parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitch-
sole's screen. ing a trailer. The car's approximate external
dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed
NOTE lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated -
see section Settings (p. 267).
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
is included when the function measures the tance sensors (p. 261)* then their information is
parking space. shown graphically as coloured areas in order to
illustrate distances to detected obstacles, see
Camera location next to the opening handle. heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the
WARNING The camera shows what is behind the car and if text.
• The parking camera serves as an aid. It something appears from the sides. The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
does not relieve the driver of responsibil- The camera shows a wide area behind the car reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
ity when reversing. and part of the bumper and any towbar. car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or
• The camera has blind spots, where obsta-
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly -
35 km/h (22 mph) backward.
cles cannot be detected.
this is normal. Light conditions
• Be aware of people and animals in the The camera image is adjusted automatically
vicinity of the car. according to prevailing light conditions. Because
NOTE
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
Objects on the display screen may be closer
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a
to the car than they appear to be on the
slightly reduced image quality.
screen.
NOTE
If another view is active then the parking camera
system takes over automatically and its camera Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
image is displayed on the screen. ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
}}
* Option/accessory. 265
DRIVER SUPPORT
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed The system's different lines.
for the driver. IMPORTANT
Boundary line, free reversing zone
The lines on the screen are projected as if they Remember, that with the rear camera view
were at ground level behind the car and are selected, the monitor only displays the area "Wheel tracks"
directly related to steering wheel movement, behind the car. Be aware of the sides and
which shows the driver the path the car will then front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse. The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
take - also when the car is turning. about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the
limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as
door mirrors and corners - also when the car is
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
266
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cars with reversing sensors* Related information Park assist camera - settings
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 267)
Activate switched-off camera
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 268)
The camera starts automatically when reverse
• Park Assist* (p. 261) gear is selected, but it can also be activated man-
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268) ually as follows:
}}
* Option/accessory. 267
DRIVER SUPPORT
268 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory. 269
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation NOTE 2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car when
The PAP function measures the space and the graphics and text so request.
NOTE steers the car - the driver's task is to:
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so
Remember that certain steering wheel posi-
tions may obstruct the combined instrument
• keep a close watch around the car request.
panel's instructions when you turn it during • follow the instructions in the combined
NOTE
the parking manoeuvre. instrument panel
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
• change gear (reverse/forward)
instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
1 - Searching and checking • control and maintain a safe speed senger side. But if required the car can also
measurements • brake and stop. be parked on the driver's side of the street:
• Activate the direction indicator to the
NOTE driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
The distance between the car and parking car instead.
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres while PAP
is searching for a parking space.
2 - Reversing in
The PAP function searches for a parking space
and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as
follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button and do not drive
faster than 30 km/h (20 mph).
270 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, 3 - Positioning IMPORTANT
then engage reverse gear.
The warning distance is shorter when the
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
sensors are used by PAP compared with
the steering wheel - and no faster than
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car when Related information
the graphics and text so request. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 273)
NOTE • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 269)
• Keep your hands away from the steering • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
wheel when the PAP function is acti- (p. 272)
vated.
When the car has reversed into the parking • Park Assist* (p. 261)
• Make sure that the steering wheel is not space, it must be straightened up and positioned. • Park assist camera* (p. 265)
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)
steering wheel has been turned, then drive
the steering wheel is fully turned before slowly forwards.
starting to drive backward/forward.
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text
message so request.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards
slowly until the graphics and text message
tell you to stop.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the positioning. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
* Option/accessory. 271
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations IMPORTANT • It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is not
The PAP sequence is stopped: Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable enough space for manoeuvring. In such park-
to find parking spaces - one reason for this ing situations, it helps the system to drive as
• if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h may be the fact that there is interference with close to the side of the road as possible
(4 mph) the sensors from external sound sources where you intend to park.
• if the driver touches the steering wheel which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may
• if the ABS34 or ESC35 function is engaged - swing out towards oncoming traffic while
e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road Examples of such sources include horns, wet being parked.
surface. tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
• Objects situated higher than the detection
A text message indicates where the PAP areas of the sensors are not included when
sequence was stopped. calculations are made for the parking
To bear in mind manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing
NOTE The driver should bear in mind that the Park into the parking space too early, and hence
Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fully-auto- such parking spaces should be avoided.
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
matic function. The driver must therefore be pre- • The driver is responsible for determining
reduce their function and may prevent meas-
pared to intervene. There are also a few details to whether the space selected by PAP is suita-
urement.
bear in mind while parking, e.g.: ble for parking.
• PAP starts out from the current location of • Use approved tyres36 with the correct tyre
the parked vehicles - if they are inappropri- pressure - this affects PAP's ability to park
ately parked then the car's tyres and wheel the car.
rims may be damaged against kerbs.
• Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
• PAP is designed for parking on straight measure the parking space incorrectly.
streets, not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
parking space when PAP measures the
space. • Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro-
truding from the car.
272 * Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 270)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 269)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 272)
• Park Assist* (p. 261)
• Park assist camera* (p. 265)
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers37 - 6 front • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)
and 4 rear.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
shampoo.
37 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 273
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine 2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For NOTE
The engine is started and switched off using the cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.) The idling speed can be noticeably higher
remote control key and the START/STOP
than normal for certain engine types during
ENGINE button. 3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button cold starting. This is done in order that the
and then release it. emissions system can reach normal operating
When the engine is started the starter motor temperature as quickly as possible, which
works until the engine is started or until its over- minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
heating protection triggers. environment.
1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
276 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
2 In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
3 Available in the XC60, cars with alarm, most cars with 4-cylinder engines or if ERS is selected for new construction. }}
* Option/accessory. 277
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| NOTE Remote start (ERS) - operation 1. Briefly press on the key's button (2).
2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
long press - at least 2 seconds - on
idling. Also take into account the local/
button (3).
national rules/regulations regarding the noise
level when the engine is running. If the conditions for remote start are fulfilled then
the following takes place:
1. The direction indicators flash quickly several
WARNING
times.
To remote-start the engine, the following cri-
teria must be met: 2. The engine starts.
3. The direction indicators illuminate with a con-
• The car must be supervised.
stant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the
• There must be no people or animals engine has started.
inside or around the car.
The key's buttons for remote start.
• The car must not be parked in a closed, NOTE
unventilated area - the exhaust gases Unlocking
may seriously injure humans and animals. After remote starting, the car continues to be
Locking locked but with deactivated movement detec-
tor*.
Related information Approach lighting
• Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 278) Unlocking, tailgate With PCC5 key
• Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages
The light indication for Approach light-
(p. 279) Information4
ing6 flashes a few times when the but-
Remote starting the engine ton is pressed and then changes over
to constant glow if all criteria for
To be able to remotely start the engine the car
remote start have been fulfilled. However, this
must be locked and the bonnet closed.
does not mean that remote start has started the
Proceed as follows: engine.
4 Only on PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 167).
5 For more information on the PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 167).
6 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 166) and Approach lighting (p. 102).
278 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
To check whether remote start has started the • The gear selector is moved out of P position Remote start (ERS) - symbols and
engine, the user can press the button (5) - if the • Active remote start time exceeds 15 minutes. messages
engine has started, there is a light indication by
the buttons (2) and (3). When a remote-started engine is switched off, In situations where the ERS function fails or is
the direction indicators illuminate with a constant interrupted, a symbol is shown in the combined
Active functions glow for 3 seconds. instrument panel, supplemented by an explana-
The following functions are activated with a tory text message.
remote started engine: Related information
• Remote start (ERS)* (p. 277) ERS function unavailable
• Climate control system
• Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages Message Specification
• Audio/video system (p. 279)
• Approach lighting. No remote ERS unavailable because a
start Too many maximum of 2 ERS activa-
Deactivated functions tries tions in succession are
The following functions are deactivated with a allowed.
remote started engine:
No remote ERS unavailable because
• Headlamps start Low fuel fuel level too low.
• Position lamps level
• Number plate lighting No remote ERS unavailable because
• Windscreen wiper. start Gear not gear selector is not in P
in P position.
Remote start is stopped
The following steps switch off a remote-started No remote ERS unavailable because
engine: start Driver in someone is in the passen-
car ger compartment.
• The remote control key's button
(1), (2) or (4) is depressed No remote ERS unavailable due to low
• The car is unlocked start Low bat- battery voltage. Charge the
tery battery by starting the
• A door is opened
engine.
• Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
depressed
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
STARTING AND DRIVING
280 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Jump starting with another battery 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps 11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
If the starter battery (p. 391) is discharged then to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). charged battery.
the car can be started with current from another
battery. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid Do not touch the connections between cable
short circuits with other components in the and car during the starting attempt. There is a
engine compartment. risk of sparks forming.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the bat- 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
tery in your car and remove the cover, see first the black and then the red.
Starter battery - replacement (p. 393). > Make sure that none of the black jump
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp lead's clamps comes into contact with the
onto the car's positive terminal (2). battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
WARNING
When jump starting the car, the following steps 8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
damage: top, the outer screw head (4).
be formed if a jump lead is connected
1. Set the car's electrical system in key position 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed incorrectly, and this can be enough for
0, see Key positions - functions at different securely so that there are no sparks during the battery to explode.
the starting attempt.
levels (p. 82). • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow can cause serious burns.
12 V. it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
sure that the two cars do not touch each
diately.
other.
}}
281
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
ponents, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the
combined instrument panel in conjunction
with a text message being shown. Follow the
recommendation given in the text message.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
282 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 283
STARTING AND DRIVING
284 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
which returns to its rest position between + Paddles* A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
and –. As a supplement to manual gear changing with provided that the engine speed does not leave
or the gear selector there are also controls located the permitted range.
on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles". After each gear change the combined instrument
• Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it. To be able to change gear with the steering panel changes figure to show the current gear.
wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
by means of pulling one of the paddles toward NOTE
selected at any time while driving.
the steering wheel - the combined instrument
Automatic deactivation
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver panel then changes indication from "D" to a fig-
allows the speed to decrease lower than a level ure, which indicates the current gear. If the steering wheel paddles are not used
suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid then they are deactivated after a short time -
To then change gear one step:
jerking and stalling. this is indicated when the combined instru-
To return to automatic driving mode: • Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards ment panel switches indication, from the fig-
the steering wheel - and release. ure for the current gear back to "D".
• Move the lever to the side to the end position
The exception is during engine braking - then
at D.
the paddles are activated as long as engine
braking is in progress.
NOTE
Manual deactivation
If the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after the The steering wheel paddle shifters can also
gear selector has been moved forwards or be deactivated manually:
backwards in its "+S–" position. The com- • Pull both paddles toward the steering
bined instrument panel then changes indica- wheel and hold until the combined instru-
tion from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, ment panel changes character from the
3 etc. is engaged. figure for the current gear to "D".
Both steering wheel "paddles".
The paddles can also be used with the gear
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are
"+": Selects the next higher gear. constantly activated without being deactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)7 The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
The Sport programme provides sportier moves off with a lower engine speed and prevent damage to the engine.
characteristics and allows higher reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
engine speed for the gears. At the Towing
same time it responds more quickly to
Kick-down If the car has to be towed - see important infor-
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
acceleration. During active driving, the use of a mation in the section Towing (p. 326).
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is Related information
upshift.
immediately engaged. This is known as kick- • Transmission fluid - grade and volume
To activate Sport mode: down. (p. 433)
• Move the gear selector to the side from D If the accelerator is released from the kick-down • Gearboxes (p. 282)
position to the end position at "+S–" - the position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
combined instrument panel changes indica-
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
tion from D to S.
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving. Safety function
To prevent over-revving the engine, the transmis-
Geartronic - Winter mode sion's control program has a protective downshift
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if inhibitor, which prevents the kick-down function.
3rd gear is engaged manually.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear down which would result in an engine speed high
selector from D position to the end position enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
changes indication from D to the figure 18. high engine speed – the original gear remains
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever for- engaged.
ward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display When kick-down is activated the car can change
shifts the indication from 1 to 3. one or more gears at a time depending on
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully. engine speed. The car changes up when the
286 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear selector inhibitor Parking position (P) Deactivate automatic gear selector
There are two different types of gear selector Stationary car with engine running: inhibitor
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic. • Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the key position (p. 82)
must be II.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in N position and the car
has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irre-
spective of whether the engine is running) then
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
G021351
287
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Starting the engine (p. 276)
11 Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.
288 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 289
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| With manual transmission, the function works • if a gear other than 1 or R is selected in Start/Stop*
only on first gear and reverse gear. manual gearshift mode on an automatic Some engine and gearbox combinations come
gearbox. fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages
With automatic transmission, gear 1 must be
selected in manual gearshift mode (+S-), or R The function can be disengaged at any time. If it in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at
must be selected. This is indicated by the number takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the traffic lights - the engine is then switched off
1 or R in the combined instrument panel, see braking effect will not release directly, but slowly temporarily and restarts automatically when the
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284). instead. journey is due to continue.
• if a gear other than 1 or R is selected on a The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
manual gearbox opportunity for a more active environmentally
290 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
conscious way of driving the car by means of Start/Stop* - function and operation Conditions M/AA
being able to allow the engine to stop automati- The Start/Stop function is activated automati-
cally, whenever appropriate. cally when the engine is started with the key. Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral M
The car's MY CAR menu system, under the position and release the clutch pedal -
The Start/Stop function is acti- the engine stops automatically.
DRIVe heading, contains information about Vol-
vated automatically when the
vo's Start/Stop system, as well as recommenda- Stop the car with the foot brake and A
engine is started with the key.
tions for energy-saving driving techniques. then keep your foot on the pedal - the
The driver is made aware of
Manual gearbox or automatic gearbox this by the function's symbol engine stops automatically.
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop illuminating in the combined A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
function depending on whether the gearbox is instrument panel and the
manual or automatic. On/Off button lamp illuminat- If the ECO function is activated
ing. then the engine may auto-stop
Related information before the car is completely
All of the car's normal systems
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291) stationary.
such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even
• Starting the engine (p. 276) with an engine that has stopped automatically,
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start except that some equipment may have the func-
(p. 294) tion temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control For certain engine variants the engine may auto-
system's fan speed or extremely high volume on
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293) stop before the car is stationary regardless of
the audio system. whether the ECO function is activated.
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 292) Auto-stopping the engine When the engine is auto-stopped, the
• Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- The following is required for the engine to auto- combined instrument panel's symbol
box (p. 295) stop: for the Start/Stop function illuminates.
}}
* Option/accessory. 291
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Auto-starting the engine Deactivating the Start/Stop function Start/Stop* - the engine does not
Conditions M/A In certain situations, it may stop
A advisable to temporarily switch Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the
off the automatic Start/Stop engine does not always stop automatically.
With the gear lever in neutral position: M function - this is carried out
with a push of this button. The engine does not auto-stop if:
1. Depress the clutch pedal or press
the accelerator pedal - the engine
starts. Conditions M/AA
Disengaged function is indicated by
2. Engage a suitable gear and drive. the combined instrument panel's the car has not first achieved M+
Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off but- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after a key A
Release the foot pressure on the foot A ton's lamp extinguishing. start or the last auto-stop.
brake - the engine starts automatically
and the journey can continue. The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is the driver has opened the seatbelt's M+
reactivated with the button or until the next time buckle. A
Maintain foot pressure on the foot A the engine is started with the key.
brake and depress the accelerator the capacity of the starter battery is M+
pedal - the engine auto-starts. Related information below the minimum permissible level. A
• Start/Stop* (p. 290)
The following option is also available on M+ the engine does not have normal M+
a downhill gradient: A • Starting the engine (p. 276)
operating temperature. A
Release the foot brake and let the car
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 294) ambient temperature is around freez- M+
move off - the engine starts automati- ing point or above approx. 30 °C. A
cally when the speed exceeds normal • Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)
walking pace. • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop the windscreen's electric heating is M+
(p. 292) activated. A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
• Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- the environment in the passenger M+
box (p. 295) compartment differs from the preset A
values - indicated by the ventilation
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
fan running at a high speed.
(p. 296)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 395) the car is reversed. M+
A
292 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory. 293
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Conditions M/AA • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Start/Stop* - the engine does not
(p. 292) auto-start
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened A • Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- The engine does not always auto-start after hav-
with the gear selector in D or N posi- box (p. 295) ing auto-stopped.
tion.
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages In the following cases the engine does not auto-
Steering wheel movementsB. A (p. 296) start after having auto-stopped:
The gear selector is moved out of the A • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 395)
D position to S positionC, R or "+/-". Conditions M/A
A
The driver's door is opened with the A
gear selector in D position - a "ping" A gear is engaged without declutching M
sound and text message inform that - a display text prompts the driver to
the Start/Stop function is active. set the gear lever in neutral position in
order to enable auto-start.
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
B With certain engines only. The driver is unrestrained. M
C Sport mode.
The driver is unrestrained, the gear A
WARNING selector is in P position and the driver’s
door is open - a normal engine start
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
stopped automatically - the engine may sud- must take place.
denly start automatically. First switch off the A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
engine as normal using the START/STOP
ENGINE button before opening the bonnet. Related information
• Start/Stop* (p. 290)
Related information • Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)
• Start/Stop* (p. 290)
• Starting the engine (p. 276)
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)
• Starting the engine (p. 276)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 292)
(p. 294)
294 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Start/Stop* (p. 290)
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)
• Starting the engine (p. 276)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 294)
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 292)
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 296)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 395)
* Option/accessory. 295
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop* - symbols and Text message there is a recommended action that should be
messages In combination with this indicator lamp performed. The following table shows some
The Start/Stop function can show text messages the Start/Stop function may show text examples.
in the combined instrument panel. messages in the combined instrument
panel for certain situations. For some of them
Autostart Engine running + Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D posi- A
acoustic signal tion.
Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE M+A
button.
Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M
Depress brake and clutch The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M
pedals to start
Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M
296 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Start/Stop* (p. 290)
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)
• Starting the engine (p. 276)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 294)
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 292)
• Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear-
box (p. 295)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 395)
* Option/accessory. 297
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive mode ECO* NOTE button lamp illuminating when the function is
ECO is an innovative Volvo function for auto- activated.
When the ECO function is activated, several
matic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel
parameters in the climate control system's ECO function On or Off
consumption by up to 5 %, depending on the
settings are changed, and several electricity Disengaged ECO function is
driver's driving style. The function gives the driver
consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- indicated by the combined
the option of a more active environmentally con-
tings can be reset manually, but full function- instrument panel ECO symbol
scious way of driving.
ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO and the ECO button lamp extin-
General function. guishing. The function is then
The following are changed switched off until it is reactiva-
upon activation of the ECO ECO - Operation ted with the ECO button.
function:
298 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
• Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without • on steep downhill gradients - to be able to More information and settings
engine braking = Low consumption use engine braking.
and • before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre -
in order to be able to complete it in the saf-
• Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting
est possible way.
with engine braking = Minimum consump-
tion. Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine
braking can be performed as follows:
NOTE • Press the ECO button.
However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- • Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-" posi-
sumption, Eco Coast in combination with tion.
short coasting distances should generally be • Change gear with the steering wheel paddle
avoided. shifters.
• Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal. The car's menu system MY CAR contains further
Activating Eco Coast information on the ECO concept - see the sec-
The function is activated when the accelerator Eco Coast - Limitations tion MY CAR (p. 115).
pedal is fully released, in combination with the The function is not available if:
following parameters: Related information
• cruise control is activated
• General information on climate control
• ECO button activated • the road's downhill gradient is steeper than (p. 126)
• Gear selector in D position approx. 6%
• Speed within the range of • manual gear changing is performed with the
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) steering wheel paddle shifters*
• The road's downhill gradient is not steeper • engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
than approx. 6%. operating temperature
299
STARTING AND DRIVING
300 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Foot brake - anti-lock braking
Symbol Specification
(p. 302) system
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Constant glow – Check the brake (p. 301) Braking System), prevents the wheels from lock-
fluid level. If the level is low, fill with ing up during braking.
brake fluid and check for the cause
of the brake fluid loss. The function allows the steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
Constant glow for 2 seconds when hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the
the engine is started - automatic brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
function check. mal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
WARNING ically after the engine has been started when the
If and illuminate at the same driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
time, there may be a fault in the brake system. matic test of the ABS system may be made at
low speed. The test may be experienced as pul-
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- ses in the brake pedal.
mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest
workshop and have the brake system checked Related information
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended. • Foot brake (p. 300)
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the • Parking brake (p. 303)
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further • Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
before topping up the brake fluid. automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
investigated. (p. 302)
Related information
• Parking brake (p. 303)
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)
301
STARTING AND DRIVING
302
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking brake Applying the parking brake ing procedure is stopped when the control is
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling released.
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels. NOTE
Function An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when braking is active at high speeds.
the electrically-controlled parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the Parking on a hill
automatic function checking of the parking brake. If the car is parked facing uphill:
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is • Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is If the car is parked facing downhill:
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four Parking brake control - apply. • Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear 1. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
wheels when the car is almost stationary. WARNING
2. Press the parking brake control.
Low battery voltage Always apply the parking brake when parking
> The combined instrument panel's on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking symbol starts flashing - once there is a has automatic transmission, is not sufficient
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- constant glow the parking brake is to hold the car in all situation.
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too applied.
low, see Jump starting with another battery
(p. 281). 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure
that the car is at a standstill position.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st
gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selec-
tor in position P (for automatic gearbox).
Emergency brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by pressing
and holding the parking brake control. The brak-
}}
303
STARTING AND DRIVING
13 For cars with keyless start and lock system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
304
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
305
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 300)
306
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory. 307
STARTING AND DRIVING
safe way and allow the engine to run at idling Driving with open tailgate/boot lid Overload - starter battery
speed for a few minutes in order to allow the When driving with the tailgate open, toxic The electrical functions in the car load the starter
gearbox to cool down. exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car battery (p. 391) to varying degrees. Avoid using
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning may through the cargo area. the key position II (p. 82) when the car is
be switched off temporarily. switched off. Instead use position I - which uses
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you WARNING less power.
stop after a hard drive. Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Also, be aware of different accessories that load
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car the electrical system. Do not use functions which
through the cargo area.
NOTE use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to Examples of such functions are:
Related information
operate for a time after the engine has been
• Loading (p. 154) • ventilation fan
switched off.
• headlamps
• windscreen wiper
• audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the com-
bined instrument panel's information display
shows the text Low battery charge Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
– In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
308
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before a long journey Winter driving battery and its capacity is reduced by the
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to For winter driving it is important to perform cer- cold.
go through the following points: tain checks in order to ensure that the car can • Use washer fluid (p. 390) to avoid ice form-
be driven safely. ing in the washer fluid reservoir.
• Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 438) is nor- Check the following in particular before the cold To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mal. season: mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or • The engine coolant (p. 376) must contain
other fluid). 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine
NOTE
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To avoid health risks, The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
• Carrying a warning triangle (p. 343) is a
different types of glycol must not be mixed. in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
legal requirement in certain countries.
permitted in all countries.
• The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
Related information condensation.
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 374)
• Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with Slippery driving conditions
• Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 339) lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
• Lamp replacement - general (p. 379)
sumption while the engine is cold. For more
Related information
information on suitable oils, see Engine oil -
adverse driving conditions (p. 429). • Winter driving (p. 309)
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
309
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing Fuel filler flap - manual opening Filling up with fuel
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as fol- The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when Important things to consider when refuelling.
lows: electric opening from the passenger compart-
ment is not possible.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap Opening/closing the fuel cap
Related information
• Filling up with fuel (p. 310)
310
STARTING AND DRIVING
14 The identifier, in accordance with the CEN standard prEN16942, is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe.
15 Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
311
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
• Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
E10 is a petrol with maximum ing the catalytic converter.
3.7 % oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol. • Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
• Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
312
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fuel - diesel lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that IMPORTANT
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but in the event of extreme weather condi- Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
cars with a diesel engine.
tions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, • Special additives
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. paraffin precipitate may occur.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel • Marine diesel fuel
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refu-
• Heating oil
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in • FAME19 and vegetable oil.
elling, check that the area around the fuel filler
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paint- These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
phur and metals.
work. Wash off any spillage with detergent and accordance with Volvo recommendations and
Identifier water. generate increased wear and engine damage
The identifier17 is located on the inside of the that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
IMPORTANT
fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be
on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at Diesel fuel must: Empty tank
filling stations throughout Europe. • fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
This is the identifier that applies for current standards tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following carry out a check. Do this before starting the
• have a sulphur content not exceeding
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel 10 mg/kg
engine: diesel:
• have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME18
B7 is diesel with maximum (B7). 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
7 volume % fatty acid methyl switch and push it in to the end position. For
ester (FAME). more information, see Key positions (p. 81).
2. Press the START button without depressing
the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
313
STARTING AND DRIVING
• Stop the car on as flat/level ground as • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions The particles in the exhaust gases are collected
(p. 438) in the filter during normal driving. So-called
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply. "regeneration" is started in order to burn away
the particles and empty the filter. This requires
the engine to have reached normal operating
Draining condensation from the fuel temperature.
filter20
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con-
For optimum performance, it is important to fol- sumption may increase slightly during regenera-
low the service intervals for fuel filter change as tion.
well as to use genuine parts developed specifi-
cally for this purpose. Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals cold weather then the engine does not reach
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or normal operating temperature. This means that
if you suspect that the car has been filled with regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not
contaminated fuel. For more information, see take place and the filter is not emptied.
Volvo service programme (p. 366).
When the filter has become approx. 80% full of
particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in
IMPORTANT
the combined instrument panel, and the message
Certain special additives remove the water Soot filter full See manual is shown in its
separation in the fuel filter. information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motorway.
314
STARTING AND DRIVING
The car should then be driven for approximately • Fuel tank - volume (p. 435) Filling vehicle gas*
20 minutes more. Refuel with vehicle gas (CNG - Compressed
Natural Gas) for cars with the Bi-Fuel engine
NOTE alternative.
The following may arise during regeneration: Filling
• a smaller reduction of engine power may Vehicle gas is filled via the gas nipple that is
be noticed temporarily located next to the fuel cap inside the fuel filler
flap.
• fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily
• a smell of burning may arise.
* Option/accessory. 315
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| 5. Refit the gas nipple's protective cover and Switch for gas operation* The switch has two positions:
close the fuel filler flap. For cars with the Bi-Fuel engine alternative there • BI-FUEL illuminates in green - the car is
is a switch to change between gas operation being driven on vehicle gas
Identifier for vehicle gas
(CNG - Compressed Natural Gas) and petrol
The identifier21 is located on the inside of the
operation. This is located by the centre console.
• BI-FUEL illuminates in amber - the car is
fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be being driven on petrol (fuel gauge for vehicle
on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at Operation gas is extinguished).
filling stations throughout Europe. The car always starts with petrol even if gas oper-
This is the identifier that ation is selected. When the engine has started
applies for current standard the system automatically changes to gas opera-
fuel in Europe. Vehicle gas with tion - normally within a few seconds of a warm
this identifier may be used in start.
cars that can be driven on Bi- When starting with a cold engine it will take
Fuel. longer before the car changes to gas operation in
order to ensure the lowest possible emissions.
Filling stations for vehicle gas
Road sign for filling stations warning lamp
that offer vehicle gas. If the warning lamp in the switch illuminates,
and/or repetitive acoustic signals can be heard,
then the car needs servicing. Acknowledge the
Press the switch to change between gas opera-
warning by pressing the switch and visit the near-
tion and petrol operation.
est workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
When the switchover takes place a clicking noise recommended.
Related information can be heard in the cargo area. This is normal -
• Bi-Fuel* - introduction to vehicle gas (p. 25) the noise is created when the tank valves open. Related information
• Bi-Fuel* - introduction to vehicle gas (p. 25)
• Inspection and service of the system for vehi-
cle gas* (p. 368) • Filling vehicle gas* (p. 315)
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 310) • Inspection and service of the system for vehi-
cle gas* (p. 368)
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 310)
316 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Catalytic converters Economical driving • Use the ECO Guide* which indicates how
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).
the engine so that operating temperature is driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- • For lower fuel consumption, activate Drive
reached quickly. tions. mode ECO22.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith • Use the Eco Coast23 freewheel function -
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel engine braking will cease and the car's
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- longer distances.
lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a • Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to
chemical reaction without being used up them- the current traffic situation and road - lower
selves. engine speeds result in lower fuel consump-
tion. Use the gear indicator (p. 283)24.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system • Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
economy. For more information, see Fuel con- mise braking.
sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 438). • High speed results in increased fuel con-
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content sumption - the wind resistance increases
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This with speed.
value is fed into an electronic system that contin- • Do not run the engine to operating tempera-
uously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to ture at idling speed, but rather drive with a
air directed to the engine is continuously normal load right after starting - a cold
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal con- engine consumes more fuel than a warm
ditions for efficient combustion, and together with one.
the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful • Drive with the correct air pressure in the
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
nitrous oxides). tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres -
approved tyre pressures (p. 446).
Related information
• Fuel - petrol (p. 312) • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
}}
• Fuel - diesel (p. 313)
* Option/accessory. 317
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| • Do not use winter tyres when the winter sea- Related information Driving with a trailer*
son is over. • Fuel - handling (p. 311) When driving with a trailer there are a number of
• Remove unnecessary items from the car - • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions important points to think about regarding e.g. the
the greater the load the higher the fuel con- (p. 438) towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is
sumption. positioned in the trailer.
• Fuel tank - volume (p. 435)
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
can take place without risk to other road total of the weight of the passengers and all
users. accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
• A roof load and space box increase air resis- load by a corresponding weight. For more
tance, leading to higher consumption - detailed information, see Weights (p. 424).
remove the load carriers when not in use.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
• Avoid driving with open windows. the car is delivered with the necessary equipment
For information about Volvo Car Corporation's for driving with a trailer.
environmental philosophy, see Environmental phi- • The car's towing bracket must be of an
losophy (p. 22). approved type.
For more information about fuel consumption, • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for
(p. 438). driving with a trailer.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
WARNING weight on the towing bracket complies with
Never switch off the engine while moving, the specified maximum towball load.
such as downhill, this deactivates important • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
systems such as the power steering and mended pressure for a full load. For informa-
brake servo.
tion on the tyre pressure, see Tyres -
approved tyre pressures (p. 446).
• The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
318 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are Related information
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at broken then the Trailer brake light • Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox
least 1000 km. malfunction text is shown. (p. 320)
• The brakes are loaded much more than usual
Level control* • Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift (p. 320)
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the • Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 321)
• For safety reasons, the maximum permitted maximum permissible weight). When the car is • Lamp replacement - general (p. 379)
speed for the car when coupled with a trailer stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
should not be exceeded. Follow the regula- which is normal.
tions in force for the permitted speeds and
weights. Trailer weights
• Maintain a low speed when driving with a For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
trailer up long, steep ascents. weights, see Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 425).
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%. NOTE
Trailer cable The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin regulations can further limit trailer weights
electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the higher towing weights than the car can
ground. actually tow.
* Option/accessory. 319
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer* - manual Driving with a trailer* - automatic Starting on a hill
gearbox gearbox 1. Depress the foot brake.
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot 2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
climate there may be a risk of overheating. climate there may be a risk of overheating.
3. Release the parking brake.
Overheating • An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot gear related to load and engine speed.
climate there may be a risk of overheating. • In the event of overheating a warning symbol Related information
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutions is illuminated in the combined instrument • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - panel with a message that is shown in the
otherwise the oil temperature may become information display - follow the recommenda-
too high. tion given.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
• Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a hitched
trailer. Always use the parking brake.
• Block the wheels with chocks when parking
a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
320 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
• Follow the installation instructions care-
fully. Towbar storage space.
• The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off. IMPORTANT
• Check that the indicator window shows Always remove the towbar after use and store
green. it in the appointed location in the car.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
}}
* Option/accessory. 321
STARTING AND DRIVING
Specifications
G021485
tools behind a side hatch in the cargo area. A 998
Related information B 81
• Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 322)
C 854
• Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 323) D 427
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 318) E 109
F 282
G Side member
H Ball centre
322 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
G021488
The indicator window must show red.
G018928
Remove the protective cover by first pressing
in the catch and then pulling the cover
straight back .
G021489
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G021487
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
}}
* Option/accessory. 323
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
G021490
G021494
G021495
The indicator window must show green. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it Safety cable.
up, down and back.
WARNING WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must
in the intended bracket.
be detached and reattached in accordance
with the previous instructions.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
324
STARTING AND DRIVING
G018929
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
Push in the locking wheel and turn it Push the protective cover until it snaps tight. car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Related information at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
• Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 321)
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
• Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 322)
triggering factor, e.g.:
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 318)
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
Operation
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
pulling the towbar rearward and upward.
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
WARNING a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
car, see Detachable towbar* - storage
The trailer stability assist function continually
(p. 321).
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
}}
* Option/accessory. 325
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- The ESC26 symbol in the combined Towing
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often instrument panel flashes when the TSA During towing, one vehicle is towed by another
enough to help the driver regain control of the system is working. vehicle using a tow rope.
car.
Related information Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA
towing before the towing begins.
system comes into action, the car/trailer combi- • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
nation is braked with all wheels and engine (p. 191) 1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu- 2. Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.
ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating 3. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
and the driver once again has full control of the remote control key in the ignition switch and
car. For more information, see Electronic stability giving a long press on the START/STOP
control (ESC) - operation (p. 192). ENGINE button - key position II is activated,
see Key positions (p. 81) for more informa-
Miscellaneous tion about key positions.
Engagement of TSA may take place at higher
4. The remote control key must remain in the
speeds.
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
326
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
327
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Take out the towing eye that is located under The cover for the towing eye's attachment WARNING
the floor hatch in the cargo area. point is available in two variants which must
be opened in different ways: No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
Applicable to Bi-Fuel* cars: The towing eye is the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
stored together with the tools behind a side • Open the variant with a recess using a onto the flatbed platform.
hatch in the cargo area. coin or similar inserted in the recess, turn-
ing it outwards. Then turn out the cover
completely and remove it. IMPORTANT
• The second variant has a marking along The towing eye is only designed for towing on
one side or in a corner: Press the marking roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
with a finger and fold out the opposite of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
side/corner at the same time using a coin assistance.
or similar - the cover turns around its axis
and can then be removed. Related information
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. • Towing (p. 326)
Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the • Recovery (p. 329)
wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible. If the slope of the
recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the
ground clearance under the car is inadequate,
then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it
up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
328 * Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
329
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
332
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337)
• Tyres - load index (p. 337)
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 332)
G021778
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 334)
333
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - tread wear indicators • Tyres - maintenance (p. 332) Tyres - air pressure
Tread wear indicators show the status of the Tyres can have different air pressures which are
tyre's tread depth. measured in bar.
G021829
Related information
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337)
• Tyres - load index (p. 337)
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 333)
334
WHEELS AND TYRES
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended Tyre pressure label Related information
tyre dimension. • Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• ECO pressure1. • Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337)
Check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. "Cold • Tyres - load index (p. 337)
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature • Tyres - maintenance (p. 332)
as the ambient temperature. After several few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the • Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 334)
pressure increases. • Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 446)
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the
G021830
car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with
tyre pressure that is too low could result in the
tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres-
sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
driving characteristics. pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
pressures the tyres should have at different loads
and speed conditions. This is also specified in the
NOTE tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a pressures (p. 446).
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also var-
ies depending on ambient temperature. Fuel economy, ECO pressure
When carrying a light load (max. 3 people) and at
speeds of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO
pressure can be selected to give the best possi-
ble fuel economy. If the best possible noise and
travelling comfort conditions are sought, the
lower comfort pressures are recommended
instead.
(See approved tyre pressures(p. 446).)
335
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Tyres - dimensions The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the with certain combinations of wheel rims and
accordance with the examples in the table examples in the table below. tyres.
below.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Related information
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W. • Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337)
This means that certain combinations of wheel • Tyres - load index (p. 337)
(wheel rim) and tyre are approved. 215 Tyre width (mm) • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 333)
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, 55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre • Tyres - maintenance (p. 332)
for example: 7Jx16x50. width (%) • Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 446)
7 Rim width in inches R Radial ply • Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 336)
J Rim flange profile 16 Rim diameter in inches (") • Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 442)
97 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
16 Rim diameter in inches • Load index and speed rating (p. 444)
load, tyre load index (LI)
50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel cen-
tre to wheel contact surface against the W Speed rating for maximum permitted
hub) speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
270 km/h (168 mph).)
Related information
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336) WARNING
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 446) 19-inch wheels must never be used on cars
• Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions that are not equipped with the R-Design or
(p. 442) Sport chassis options. The use of 19-inch
wheels on cars with standard chassis con-
stitutes a safety risk, with a risk of vehicle
damage, and it impairs the car's driving cha-
racteristics.
336
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - load index Tyres - speed ratings W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
certain load. speed and therefore belongs to a particular Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
WARNING
load capacity required of the tyres. Lowest per- the car's top speed. The table below indicates the The car must be fitted with tyres which have
missible index is specified in the tyre load index maximum permitted speed that applies for each the same or a higher load index (p. 337) (LI)
table, see section "Specifications" in the printed speed rating (SS). The only exception to these and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
owner's manual. regulations is the winter tyre (p. 338)2, where a used, it may overheat.
lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is
Related information chosen, the car must not be driven faster than
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336) the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q Related information
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 446) can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h • Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337) (100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how • Tyres - load index (p. 337)
fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 332) • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 333)
the tyres.
• Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 442) NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
337
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel bolts Winter tyres mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter tread depth of less than 4 mm.
hubs and are available in different versions. road conditions.
Using snow chains
Winter tyres Snow chains may only be used on the front
IMPORTANT wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on Never drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph) with
Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
damage the nuts and the bolts. correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
wheels.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by WARNING
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. NOTE Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
Check the torque with a torque wrench. chains designed for the car model, and tyre
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel and rim dimensions. In the event of uncer-
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types tainty Volvo recommends that you consult an
bolts. are most suitable. authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow
chains may cause serious damage to your car
Locking wheel bolts* and lead to an accident.
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alumi- Studded tyres
nium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into Related information
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts. the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the • Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 339)
studs, a longer service life.
Related information
• Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 336) NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
338 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Changing wheels - removing wheels IMPORTANT eyelets, run the strap diagonally over the spare
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter wheel and through the upper handle. Tighten the
wheels/winter tyres. • Never drive faster than 80 km/h short tensioning strap onto the long one. Attach
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car. the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.
Spare wheel* • The car must never be driven fitted with
Two different versions of the spare wheel can be more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel. Taking out the spare wheel under the
supplied, in a bag or beneath the cargo floor. cargo area floor
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
The following instructions only apply if a The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
spare wheel has been purchased as an well with the outside down. The same bolt runs 2. Undo the retaining screw.
accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped through to secure the spare wheel and the foam 3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
with a spare wheel - see information about Emer- block. The foam block contains all the tools nee-
gency puncture repair (TMK) (p. 359). ded to change the wheels. 4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only The spare wheel is supplied in a bag and must be Taking out the spare wheel in the bag
intended for use temporarily and must be secured on the cargo area floor using straps. 1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possi- from the cargo area and remove it from the
ble. The car's handling may be altered by the use spare wheel bag.
of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.
than the normal wheel. The car's ground clear-
ance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to 3. Lift the tools and jack out from the foam
high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If block.
the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you
cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all- Removing
wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be Set up warning triangle (p. 343) if a wheel is
disconnected. The spare wheel must not be replaced in trafficked location. The car and jack*
repaired. must be on a firm horizontal surface.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is 1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 303) and
stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 446). Cars with four load retaining eyelets.
engage reverse gear, or position P if the car
has an automatic gearbox.
Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning strap
hooks in the front load retaining eyelets. Attach
the long strap into one of the front load retaining
}}
* Option/accessory. 339
WHEELS AND TYRES
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which is
indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
height.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
2. Take out jack*, wheel wrench*, removal tool prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
for wheel covers* and plastic wheel bolt cap blocks or large stones for example.
removal tool. They will be found in the foam
block. If another jack is selected, see Raising
the car (p. 369).
340 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory. 341
WHEELS AND TYRES
Changing wheels - fitting 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot NOTE
It is important that the procedure for fitting the rotate.
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be
wheel is carried out correctly.
positioned over the valve on the wheel rim
Installation during fitting.
NOTE
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
342 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory. 343
WHEELS AND TYRES
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
The car's tools are located behind the side hatch specific car model may be used to raise the
in the cargo area. car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
Located under the cargo area floor are the car's Related information change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is • Emergency puncture repair (p. 359) ommended. In this instance, follow the
also space here for the sleeve for the locking instructions for use that come with the equip-
• Towing eye (p. 327)
wheel bolts and tools for the plastic wheel bolt ment.
caps. • Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 339)
• Wheel bolts (p. 338)
• Jack* (p. 344)
344 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tools - returning into place First aid kit* Applies to Bi-Fuel* cars
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The tools and jack* must be stored in the If the car has been locked with privacy locking
intended location in the car's cargo area then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch can-
when not in use. not be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 171).
Related information
• Warning triangle (p. 343)
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 359)
* Option/accessory. 345
WHEELS AND TYRES
346 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Deleting the messages changed or the tyre pressure is adjusted by reca- 7. Drive the car.
1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a librating the system in MY CAR. > Recalibration is carried out automatically
tyre pressure gauge. For example, the tyre pressure should be while the car is being driven and can be
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for interrupted at any time. If the engine is
in accordance with the tyre pressure label on high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)). switched off while recalibration is in pro-
the driver's side door pillar (between front Following which, the system must be recalibrated. gress then it is resumed when the car is
and rear doors). driven again. The system provides no con-
Recalibration firmation when the calibration is complete.
3. Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR. Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 115). The new reference value applies until steps 1-7
NOTE are repeated.
1. Stop the engine.
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" 2. Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in NOTE
means the tyres are the same temperature as accordance with the tyre pressure label on
Remember that the TM system must be reca-
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours the driver's side door pillar (between front
librated at each tyre change or if the tyre
after the car has been driven). After a few kil- and rear doors).
pressure is adjusted. If new reference values
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the Or see the tyre pressure table. are not stored then the system cannot func-
pressure increases. tion properly.
3. Start the engine and let the car stand still.
4. Open the menu system MY CAR and select
WARNING the menu Tyre monitor. NOTE
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre 5. Select Start calibration and press OK. • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
failure, which could result in the driver the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
losing control of the car. 6. Press OK after all tyres have been checked the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
and adjusted in order to start calibration.
• The system cannot indicate sudden tyre • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
damage in advance. caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
TM calibration
In order for TM system to work correctly, a refer-
ence value for the tyre pressure must be deter-
mined. This must be done each time the tyres are
}}
347
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| System and tyre status Tyre pressure monitoring system • Tyre needs air now Check rear right tyre
The current status of the system and the tyres (TPMS)*6 - general information • Tyre needs air now Check rear left tyre
can be checked in the centre console's screen. Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Pressure • Tyre pressure system Service required
1. Open the menu system MY CAR. Monitoring System) warns the driver when the
pressure is too low in one or more of the car's If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if a
2. Select the Tyre monitor menu. sensor has failed then Tyre pressure system
tyres.
> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a Service required will be shown.
colour code. System description For information on the correct tyre pressure, see
The TPMS system uses sensors located inside Tyres - air pressure (p. 334).
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
the air valve in each wheel. When the car is
accordance with the following:
driven at approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) the system
• All-green: the system is operating normally detects the tyre pressure.
IMPORTANT
and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly If a fault occurs in the TPMS system the indi-
Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can be
above the recommended level. cator symbol in the combined instrument
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
• Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then
is too low. The system does not replace normal tyre mainte- illuminate with a constant glow. A message is
nance. also shown in the combined instrument panel.
• All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have
pressure that is too low. Messages
• All wheels grey and the message Tyre If the pressure is too low then an indicator sym- Related information
pressure system Currently unavailable: bol illuminates in the combined instrument • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust
the tyre pressure system is temporarily deac- panel and one of the following messages is (recalibration) (p. 349)
tivated. It may be necessary to drive the car shown: • Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
for a short time above 30 km/h (20 mph) rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 351)
before the system becomes active again.
• Tyre pressure low Check front right tyre
• Tyre pressure low Check front left tyre • Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
• All wheels grey and the message Tyre activate/deactivate (p. 350)
pressure system Service required: an • Tyre pressure low Check rear right tyre
• Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recom-
error has occurred in the system. Contact a • Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre mendations (p. 350)
Volvo dealer or workshop.
• Tyre needs air now Check front right
• Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* -
Related information tyre driveable punctured tyres* (p. 352)
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 334) • Tyre needs air now Check front left tyre
348 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*7 - 5. Select Calibrate tyre pressure and press Tyre pressure monitoring system
adjust (recalibration) OK. (TPMS)*8 - tyre status
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) uses 6. Drive for at least 10 minutes at a speed of at Using the tyre pressure monitoring system
a reference value on which the warning for low least 30 km/h (20 mph). TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) it is
tyre pressure is based. > Calibration is performed automatically fol- possible to check the tyre status in the centre
lowing initialisation by the driver. The sys- console's screen.
Change the reference value by recalibrating the
tem provides no confirmation when the
system, such as for driving with a heavy load, for System and tyre status
example. calibration is complete.
The current status of the system and the tyres
Always adjust the tyre pressure according to Vol- The new reference values apply until steps 1-6 can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 115).
vo's recommended tyre pressure values before are carried out again.
1. Open the menu system MY CAR.
recalibration. Related information 2. Select the Tyre pressure menu.
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 346) > Status for tyre pressures is shown with a
NOTE
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 334) colour code.
The car must be stationary when calibration is
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
started.
accordance with the following:
Settings are made using the centre console's • All-green: the system is operating normally
controls, see MY CAR (p. 115). and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly
above the recommended level.
1. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on • Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is too low.
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors). • Red wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure is
very low.
2. Start the engine.
• All wheels grey: the system is temporarily
3. Open the menu system MY CAR. unavailable. It may be necessary to drive the
4. Select the Tyre pressure menu. car for a few minutes at a speed above
6 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front.
7 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front.
8 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front. }}
* Option/accessory. 349
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 30 km/h (20 mph) before the system Tyre pressure monitoring system Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*11
becomes active again. (TPMS)*9 - activate/deactivate10 - recommendations
• All wheels grey and the message Tyre In certain markets it is possible to activate/deac- Recommendations for the tyre pressure monitor-
pressure system Service required: an tivate the tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS ing system TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
error has occurred in the system. Contact a (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). System).
Volvo dealer or workshop.
NOTE • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are
Related information fitted to all wheels on the car, including win-
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 346) The car must be stationary when the tyre ter wheels.
pressure monitoring is activated/deactivated.
• Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* - • Volvo recommends that sensors are not
rectifying low tyre pressure (p. 351) moved between different wheels.
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 115). • The spare wheel is not equipped a with
TPMS sensor.
1. Start the engine.
• If the spare wheel or a wheel without a
2. Open the menu system MY CAR. TPMS sensor is used, the error message
Tyre pressure system Service required
3. Select the Tyre pressure menu.
will be shown in the combined instrument
4. Select Tyre monitoring and press OK. panel.
> An X is shown in the information display if • Always check the system after changing a
the system is activated, the option disap- wheel in order to ensure that replacement
pears if the system is deactivated. wheels work with the system.
9 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front.
10 Only in certain markets.
11 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front.
350 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
minutes otherwise an error message will be Tyre pressure monitoring system NOTE
shown in the combined instrument panel. (TPMS)*12 - rectifying low tyre
pressure • The TPMS system uses a so-called com-
pensated pressure value, based on both
WARNING When the tyre pressure monitoring system tyre temperature and ambient tempera-
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) gives ture. This means that the tyre pressure
hold the nozzle of the pump directly against a warning, the tyre pressure is too low in one or may differ slightly from the recommended
the valve to avoid damaging the valve. more of the car's tyres. pressures listed on the tyre pressure
If a tyre pressure message has been shown and label on the driver's side door pillar
NOTE the TPMS indicator lamp has been illuminated: (between front and rear doors). For this
reason, it may be necessary to inflate the
• After a tyre has been inflated, always refit 1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated tyres to a slightly higher pressure in order
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge. to clear a low tyre pressure message.
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure • To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres-
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust in accordance with the tyre pressure label on sure should be checked on cold tyres.
caps can rust and become difficult to the driver's side door pillar (between front "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the
unscrew. and rear doors). same temperature as the ambient tem-
3. In some cases it may be necessary to drive perature (approx. 3 hours after the car
NOTE the car for a few minutes at a speed above has been driven). After a few kilometres
30 km/h (20 mph) in order to clear the mes- of driving, the tyres warm up and the
If you want to change the tyre dimension then pressure increases.
the TPMS system must be reconfigured. For sage. At which point, the TPMS indicator
further information - contact a Volvo dealer. lamp is extinguished as well.
WARNING
Related information • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 346) failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
• The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
12 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front. }}
* Option/accessory. 351
WHEELS AND TYRES
13 Only possible on the factory-built S60/V60 Polestar with 20-inch wheels and Brembo brakes at the front.
352 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory. 353
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Country/Area
Brazil
Ukraine
354
WHEELS AND TYRES
Country/Area
Israel
}}
355
WHEELS AND TYRES
356
WHEELS AND TYRES
Country/
Area
Czech Continental tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radio Transmitter je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
Republic: směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Continental erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio Transmitter overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass sich das Gerät Radio Transmitter in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental seadme Radio Transmitter vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK Hereby, Continental declares that this Radio Transmitter is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Continental declara que el Radio Transmitter cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: Η Α Α Continental Η Ω Radio Transmitter Ω Α Ω Α Α Η Α
Α Α Η Η Α 1999/5/ .
France: Par la présente Continental déclare que l'appareil Radio Transmitter est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Continental dichiara che questo Radio Transmitter è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka Radio Transmitter atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lithuania: Šiuo Continental deklaruoja, kad šis Radio Transmitter atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nether- Hierbij verklaart Continental dat het toestel Radio Transmitter in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
lands: relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
}}
357
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Country/
Area
Malta: Hawnhekk, Continental, jiddikjara li dan Radio Transmitter jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti
li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Continental nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio Transmitter megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv
egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland: Niniejszym Continental oświadcza, że Radio Transmitter jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal: Continental declara que este Radio Transmitter está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Continental izjavlja, da je ta Radio Transmitter v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že Radio Transmitter spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland: Continental vakuuttaa täten että Radio Transmitter tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Härmed intygar Continental att denna Radio Transmitter står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Hér með lýsir Continental yfir því að Radio Transmitter er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norway: Continental erklærer herved at utstyret Radio Transmitter er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Related information
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 346)
358 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
}}
359
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Applies to Bi-Fuel* cars Emergency puncture repair kit - Sealing fluid bottle
overview
Pressure gauge
Overview of the component parts of the emer-
gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK). Sealing fluid bottle
Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the
The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo expiration date has passed and after use. Treat
area. the old bottle as environmentally hazardous
waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
The emergency puncture repair kit is located behind the
side hatch in the cargo area.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Related information Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
• Emergency puncture repair kit - overview Store out of the reach of children.
(p. 360)
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 359)
WARNING
Label, maximum permitted speed • In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
Switch
ately with soap and plenty of water.
Electrical cable • Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
Bottle holder (orange cap) eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
Protective cap
should be examined by a doctor.
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
360 * Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information Emergency puncture repair - 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
• Emergency puncture repair kit - location operation hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
(p. 359) Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture in a trafficked location.
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 359) repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
Emergency puncture repair seal the hole.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre
repair kit has been used.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0, and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
}}
361
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- 7. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
tle holder. 12 V socket and start the car.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are IMPORTANT
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent NOTE The compressor must not be operated for
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
ing. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres-
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo work- sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres-
shop. WARNING sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve
Do not leave children in the car without if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING supervision when the engine is running.
• In the event of skin contact with the seal- WARNING
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
with soap and plenty of water. position I. If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
• Sealing fluid that makes contact with an be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
eye must be rinsed away immediately with WARNING centre is recommended.
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
discomfort persists then the eye should be pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
examined by a doctor. arise then the compressor must be switched electrical cable.
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Contacting an authorised tyre cen- 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve
WARNING tre is recommended. and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
a reverse catch to prevent leakage. to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
NOTE
fluid.
When the compressor starts, the pressure
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
Check that the pressure reducing valve on drops after approximately 30 seconds.
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
362
WHEELS AND TYRES
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a Emergency puncture repair - 3. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so rechecking 1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. When a tyre has been sealed with the emer- 12 V socket and start the car.
gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
NOTE (TMK), a subsequent check must be made after
to the pressure specified in accordance
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during approx. 3 kilometres of driving.
with the tyre pressure table.
the first few rotations of the tyre. Check tyre pressure 3. Switch off the compressor.
Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The com-
4. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the
WARNING pressor must be switched off.
protective cap on the air hose and fold the
Make sure that nobody is standing near the 1. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap. hose in the box.
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto Take out the air hose and screw in the
them when the car is driven away. The dis- WARNING
valve connection to the bottom of the thread
tance should be at least two metres.
on the tyre's air valve. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
15. Follow-up inspection:
gauge.
Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve 5. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
again and check the tyre pressure with the • If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar15
pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The
journey should not be continued. Contact NOTE
repair - rechecking (p. 363).
a tyre centre. • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
Related information the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
• If the tyre pressure is higher than
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 359)
1.3 bar15, the tyre must be inflated to the the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
• Emergency puncture repair - rechecking pressure specified in accordance with the • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
(p. 363) tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved caps can rust and become difficult to
• Emergency puncture repair kit - overview tyre pressures (p. 446). unscrew.
(p. 360) • Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
363
WHEELS AND TYRES
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in • Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (p. 360)
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit danger to life. Never leave the engine running
has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient • Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection ventilation. (p. 363)
of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it WARNING
needs to be replaced. Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
Related information
• Emergency puncture repair (p. 359) 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
• Emergency puncture repair - operation position I.
(p. 361)
• Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 360)
364
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme Book service and repair*1 4. Choose preferred communication channel
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, Manage service, repair and booking information (phone). Booking information is always sent
follow the Volvo service programme as specified directly in your Internet-connected car. to the car and to you via email.
in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Prerequisite for booking from car
This service1 provides a convenient way to book a • To send and receive booking information
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car from and to the car, the car must be con-
workshop to perform the service and mainte- information is sent to your dealer, who can pre- nected to the Internet, see the Sensus Info-
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, pare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact tainment supplement for information about
special tools and service literature to guarantee you to schedule an appointment time. For certain how to connect the car to the Internet.
the highest quality of service. markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled
appointment time as it approaches and the navi- • Since the booking information is sent over
your private phone subscription, you will be
IMPORTANT gation system2 can also guide you to the work-
asked whether you want to send the informa-
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and shop when the time comes.
tion. The question is asked once and then
follow the instructions in the Service and applies to the selected connection for a lim-
Warranty Booklet. Before the service can be used ited time.
Volvo ID and my profile • For the service to work and for the system to
Related information • Register a Volvo ID. For more information communicate via the car's screen, notifica-
• Climate control system - fault tracing and and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID tions/pop-up messages must be accepted.
repair (p. 379) (p. 21). In the normal view for the MY CAR source,
• Log in to the owner portal My Volvo, go to press OK/MENU and then Service & repair
your profile and carry out the following: Display notifications.
1. Check that the car is connected to your pro-
file.
Using the service
All menus and settings are accessed from the
2. Check that your contact information is cor- normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU
rect. and then Service & repair.
3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact When it is time for service, and in some cases
for service and repair. when the car is in need of repair, this is notified
366 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) and via • Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the Call the dealer1
a pop-up menu in the screen. next time the car is started. With a Bluetooth® phone connected to the car,
Book a service or repair manually1 you can call your dealer. For connecting the
1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre con- phone, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
sole and select Service & repair Dealer – Select Service & repair Dealer
information Request service or repair. information Call dealer.
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your
Using the navigation system1, 2
dealer.
Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint
2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to the in the navigation system.
car.
– Select Service & repair Dealer
3. Accept or request a new booking proposal.
information Set single destination.
After the booking has been accepted the book-
– Select Service & repair Dealer
Service message in the screen. ing information is stored in the car, see My book-
ings. The car will automatically communicate with information Add as waypoint.
Meaning of the answer options in the screen's
you via the screen by means of reminders about Sending vehicle data1
pop-up menu:
the booking and guide you to the workshop visit. Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database
• Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your You can also book a workshop visit via My Volvo. (not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can
dealer who then comes back with a booking retrieve vehicle information using the car's identi-
Go to "My bookings" and select "Update" in
proposal. The service lamp and service mes- fication number (VIN3). The number is printed in
order to gain access to bookings from My Volvo.
sage in the combined instrument panel are the car's service and warranty booklet, alterna-
extinguished. My bookings1
tively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand
Show booking information in the car's screen.
• No - No more pop-up messages will be Accept or request a new booking proposal.
corner.
shown in the screen. The message in the
– Select Service & repair Send car data.
combined instrument panel remains. After – Select Service & repair My bookings.
this option has been selected, it is possible
to start the manual booking in the car, see
below.
367
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
368 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
}}
369
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the
car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it
must be positioned under one of the lifting
points. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi-
tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift
then the front and rear lifting arms can be posi-
tioned under the outer lifting points (jacking
points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can
be used at the front.
Related information
• Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 339)
370
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Radiator
371
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| WARNING Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located Engine compartment - checking
on the driver's side) Some oils and fluids should be checked at regu-
The ignition system has very high voltage and
output. The voltage in the ignition system is Starter battery lar intervals.
highly dangerous. The car's electrical system
must always be in key position 0 when work is Relay and fuse box Regular checking
being performed in the engine compartment; Check the following oils and fluids at regular
see Key positions - functions at different lev- Washer fluid filler pipe intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
els (p. 82).
• Coolant
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil WARNING • Engine oil
when the car's electrical system is in key
position II or when the engine is hot. The car's electrical system must always be in • Power steering fluid (not cars with 4-cyl.
key position 0 when work is being performed
engine)
in the engine compartment; see Key positions
Engine compartment 5-cyl. diesel - functions at different levels (p. 82). • Washer fluid
Related information
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 371)
372
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil - general When driving under adverse conditions, see informed via the instrument's warning symbol
An approved engine oil must be used in order Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 429). and display texts. Certain variants have
that the recommended service intervals can be both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
applied. IMPORTANT information.
In order to fulfil the requirements for the Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
engine's service intervals all engines are filled with the intervals specified in the Service and
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil Warranty Booklet.
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
made very carefully with regard to service life,
mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
environmental impact.
than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse
An approved engine oil must be used in order driving conditions (p. 429).
that the recommended service intervals can
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
volume (p. 430).
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting charac- Related information
teristics, fuel consumption and environmental • Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 374)
Volvo recommends:
impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
373
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
4-cyl.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km and have
been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine
switched off and on level ground before the
Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand dis- oil level indication is correct.
play is shown in the digital combined instrument panel
and the right-hand in the analogue.
Message
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
Engine oil level due to the risk of fire.
Filler pipe5.
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
between service intervals. engine is switched off, see Menu navigation -
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level combined instrument panel (p. 112).
until a message is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel's display, see the following illustra- WARNING
tion. If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level may
be too high.
374
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
375
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling
level is 4.
be carried out in accordance with the following
sequence. Related information
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - • Engine oil - general (p. 373)
functions at different levels (p. 82).
376
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- IMPORTANT Brake and clutch fluid - level
tions on the packaging. Never top up with water Brake and clutch fluid level should be between
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
little and too much coolant concentrate. other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system. Checking the level
If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir.
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of agent as recommended by Volvo. The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check
engine damage when starting due to a defective • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
cooling system. water and 50% coolant. the level regularly.
• Mix the coolant with approved quality tap Change the brake fluid every other year or at
water. In the event of any doubt about every other regular service.
WARNING water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in The fluid should be changed annually on cars
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant accordance with Volvo recommendations. driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent brak-
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan- • When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing, such as driving in mountains or tropical cli-
ing system components, flush the cooling mates with high humidity.
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure. system clean with approved quality tap For capacities and recommended brake fluid
water or flush with ready-mixed coolant. grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume
• The engine must only be run with a well- (p. 434).
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur result- WARNING
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec-
For capacities and for standards regarding water ommends that the reason for the loss of
quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 432). brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
}}
377
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
378
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fault tracing and repair The bulbs are specified (p. 387). The following
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent list contains locations of bulbs and other light
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- sources that are specialised, such as LED7
ing leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
379
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some IMPORTANT • Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
other reason, except at a workshop8: (p. 386)
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
• active xenon headlamps - ABL (xenon lamps) your fingers. Grease from your fingers is • Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 386)
• daytime running lights/position lamps, front vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
• Cornering lights
• side direction indicators, door mirrors
• approach lighting, door mirrors NOTE
• Interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting If an error message remains after the broken
front bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
• Position lamps, rear
• side marker lamps
NOTE
• Brake light.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
WARNING lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
On cars with xenon headlamps, the replace- rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
ment of xenon lamps must be carried out at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is Condensation is normally vented out of the
recommended. Working with xenon lamps lamp housing when the lamp has been
demands extreme caution because the head- switched on for a time.
lamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
Related information
WARNING • Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 381)
The car's electrical system must be in key • Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key posi- (p. 385)
tions - functions at different levels (p. 82). • Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 386)
380
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector.
381
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - cover for main/ • Lamp replacement - extra main beam Lamp replacement - dipped beam
dipped beam bulbs (p. 384) The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the head-
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by lamp's larger cover.
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
382
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
383
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
2. Remove the cover (p. 382). 4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb anti-
clockwise in order to detach it.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and
then pulling straight out. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
384 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - rear lamp 6. Press down the catch when the bulb holder Lamp replacement - location of rear
Bulbs for rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp is refitted. lamps
and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the 7. Refit the insulation and panel. The overview shows the location of the lamps at
cargo area. the rear.
Related information
Lamp housing, rear • Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 385)
• Lamps - specifications (p. 387)
385
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - number plate Lamp replacement - lighting in Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting cargo area lighting
The number plate lighting is located under the The cargo area lighting is located in the tailgate. The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
tailgate handle. lamp lenses.
G031942
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Carefully detach the whole bulb housing and 2. Replace the bulb. 1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and
withdraw it. gently prize up the lug on the edge.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
3. Replace the bulb. back the lamp housing. 2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
4. Refit the whole bulb housing and screw it 3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
Related information straight out to the side and replace with a
into place.
• Lamps - specifications (p. 387) new one. Note! - Do not squeeze the bulb
Related information too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb
• Lamps - specifications (p. 387) glass could then break.
386
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
387
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
388
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
Car wash (p. 411).
}}
389
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Topping up the washer fluid takes place by open- • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.4 litres.
ing the blue cap. • Cars without headlamp washing: 4.0 litres.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a
common reservoir.
Related information
• Wiper blades (p. 388)
When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid • Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 371)
remaining in the reservoir, a message to top
up the washer fluid will be shown in the com-
bined instrument panel, together with the
symbol .
390
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
391
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
392
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from the
ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before
Risk of explosion. any electrical connections are touched - this is
because the car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to control mod-
ules.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support bat-
tery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
• Starter battery - general (p. 391)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 395)
Open the clips on the front cover and remove
the cover.
}}
393
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Release the rubber moulding so that the rear Cross-stay on the R-Design* NOTE
cover is free.
Tighten the screws to 30 Nm. Check the tor-
Remove the rear cover by screwing one que with a torque wrench.
quarter turn and lifting it away.
Fitting
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and nega-
tive cables in the correct order.
2. Loosen and remove the screws (one on the 4. Connect the ventilation hose.
Move the battery aside.
right and one on the left-hand side) that hold > Check that it is correctly connected to
the cross-stay. both battery and outlet in the body.
Lift it up.
3. Remove the cross-stay. 5. Connect the red positive cable.
> Now the starter battery can be removed in 6. Connect the black negative cable.
accordance with the previous section.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section
• Fitting the cross-stay takes place in the "Removal".)
reverse order.
8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
394 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
9. Align the front cover and secure it with the Battery - Start/Stop Battery
clips. (See "Removal".) Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with a support battery in addition to the starter Start, 12 V Support, 12 V
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Starter battery - general (p. 391) and Jump battery. Left-hand drive
starting with another battery (p. 281). car:
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
Cold
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful bat- 120E
start 720C
tery for starting and one support battery that
helps during the Start/Stop function's starting capacityA 170F
- CCAB 760D
sequence. Right-hand drive
(A)
For more information on the Start/Stop function, car:
see Start/Stop* (p. 290). 120
For more information on the car's starter battery, Left-hand drive
see Jump starting with another battery (p. 281). car:
The following table shows specifications for the
150×90×106E
starter battery and support battery respectively in Size,
cars with Start/Stop function. L×W×H 278×175×190 150×90×130F
(mm)
Right-hand drive
car:
150×90×106
}}
* Option/accessory. 395
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
396
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
• Battery - symbols (p. 392)
397
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - general Location of central electrical units • Fuses - in cargo area (p. 407)
All electrical functions and components are pro- • Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect zone (p. 409)
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
see whether the curved wire has blown. electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
398
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
399
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Parking heater* 25 - -
- -
400 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory. 401
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Function AA
Cooling fan (petrol) 60/80D
Cooling fan (diesel) 80
Power steering 100
A Ampere
B For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty
- see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone
(p. 409).
C For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty
- see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone
(p. 409).
D Depending on cooling fan variant.
Related information
• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 403)
• Fuses - in the control module under the glo-
vebox (p. 405)
• Fuses - in cargo area (p. 407)
402
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory. 403
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Function AA Function AA
404 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Interior lighting; Driver's door con- 7.5 Interior lighting; Rain sensor* 7.5 Heated windscreen* 15
trol panel, power windows; Power
Steering wheel module 7.5 Unlocking, tailgate 10
seats*
}}
* Option/accessory. 405
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
- -
Airbags 10
Sunroof* 20
Immobiliser 5
A Ampere
406 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory. 407
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
408
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory. 409
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
- -
- -
Start relay 30
- -
Support battery 70
Related information
• Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 399)
• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 403)
410 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Car wash risk of water stains that may need to be pol- to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
The car should be washed as soon as it ished away is reduced. matic car washes with washing by hand.
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean as the dirt does not attach as firmly. It WARNING NOTE
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the Always have the engine cleaned by a work- The car must only be washed by hand over
car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. the first few months. This is because the paint
separator. Use car shampoo. is more delicate when it is new.
Handwashing IMPORTANT
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
High-pressure washing
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
substances that affect and discolour paint- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
example.
work very quickly. For example, use soft does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- use water and a non-scratching sponge
mended for the removal of any discoloration. instead. Testing the brakes
• Hose down the underbody.
WARNING
• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has NOTE
been removed in order to reduce the risk of Always test the brakes after washing the car,
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear including the parking brake, to ensure that
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
lamps may temporarily have condensation on moisture and corrosion do not attack the
onto the locks.
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- brake linings and reduce braking perform-
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on rior lighting is designed to withstand this. ance.
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces Condensation is normally vented out of the
must not then be warmed up by the sun! lamp housing when the lamp has been Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and switched on for a time. when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
plenty of lukewarm water. heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap Automatic car washes warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
solution or car shampoo. An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way in very damp or cold weather.
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing water where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
}}
411
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
412 * Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid • Take care when cleaning so as not to dam-
age the glass surface.
or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack-
aging carefully. Many preparations contain both • To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
polish and wax. removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
• Treatment with a special finishing agent
IMPORTANT available from Volvo dealers is recommended
in order to maintain the water-repellent prop-
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
erties on the side windows. This should be
rubber.
used first after three years and then each
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, year.
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge. IMPORTANT
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
away or damage the glossy surface layer. from the windows. Use the heating to remove
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and
not be used. rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 108).
}}
* Option/accessory. 413
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
414
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
fabric care product is available for purchase from Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong Related information
a Volvo dealer. stain removers. A special cleaning agent available • Car wash (p. 411)
from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult
Leather upholstery cleaning.
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance. Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
allowing it to retract.
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a Inlay mats and floor mat
comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
upholstery which, when used in accordance with uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective mat is secured with pins.
coating.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
cleaning and application of the protective cream
once to four times per year (or more if required). Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for pin.
purchase from a Volvo dealer.
WARNING
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
for cleaning the leather steering wheel. cent to and under the pedals.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- A special textile cleaner is recommended for
tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- mats must be cleaned with agents recommended
faces. by a Volvo dealer.
415
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
G021832
Exterior colour code
adhesive primers available in spray cans.
• Base coat and clear coat - are available in Any secondary exterior colour code
Before work is started, the car must be clean and
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks19.
It is important that the correct colour is used. For dry as well as at a temperature above 15 °C.
• Masking tape. product label location, see Type designations
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
• Fine sand paper18. (p. 420).
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
Colour code
The label for colour code is located on the car's If the damage has reached down to a metal
door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use a
door is opened. primer. In the event of damage to a plastic
surface, an adhesive primer should be used
for better results - spray into the spray can's
cap and brush thinly.
18 If required.
19 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
416
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
• Rustproofing (p. 414)
417
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number,
etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be
read on a label in the car.
420
SPECIFICATIONS
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
}}
421
SPECIFICATIONS
422
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
423
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights NOTE
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
label in the car.
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank extra equipment or accessories. This means
90% full and all fluids. that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
The weight of passengers and accessories, and by the weight of the accessory.
towball load (p. 425) (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not included Examples of accessories that reduce load
in the kerb weight. capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - as other accessories such as towbar, load
Kerb weight. carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary For information on label location, see Type designations
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, (p. 420).
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car. Max. front axle load
Related information
• Towing capacity and towball load (p. 425)
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 438)
424
SPECIFICATIONS
V60 Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
Engine
T2 B4154T5 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T3 B4204T37 Manual, M66 1600 75
T3 B4154T4 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T3 B4154T6 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T4 B4204T19 Manual, M66 1600 75
T4 B4204T19 Automatic, TF-71SC 1600 75
T5/Bi-Fuel B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
T5 B4204T41 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
T6 B4204T9 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
T6 AWD B4204T9 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
D2 D4204T8 Manual, M66 1600 75
D2 D4204T20 Automatic, TF-71SC 1600 75
D3 D4204T9 Manual, M66 1600 75
D3 D4204T9 Automatic, TF-71SC 1600 75
}}
425
SPECIFICATIONS
|| V60 Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
Engine
D4 D4204T14 Manual, M66 1800 90
D4 D4204T14 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
D4 AWD D5244T21 Automatic, TF-80SD 1800 90
D5 D4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 420).
Related information
• Weights (p. 424)
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 318)
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 325)
426 * Option/accessory.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
427
SPECIFICATIONS
|| V60 Engine codeA Output Output Torque No. of cylinders Bore Stroke Swept volume Compression ratio
Engine (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) (mm) (mm) (litres)
T2 B4154T5 90/5000 122/5000 220/1600-3500 4 82.0 70,9 1,498 10.5:1
T3 B4154T4 112/5000 152/5000 250/1700-4000 4 82.0 70,9 1,498 10.5:1
T3 B4204T37 112/5000 152/5000 250/1300-4000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 11.3:1
T3 B4154T6 112/5000 152/5000 250/1700-4000 4 82.0 70,9 1,498 8,8:1
T4 B4204T19 140/4700 190/4700 300/1300-4000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 11.3:1
T5/Bi-Fuel B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/1500–4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1
T5 B4204T41 180/5500 245/5500 350/1500–4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 8,6:1
T6 / T6 AWD B4204T9 225/5700 306/5700 400/2100-4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.3:1
Polestar B4204T43 270/6000 367/6000 470/3100-5000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 8,6:1
D2 D4204T8 88/3750 120/3750 280/1500-2250 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 16.0:1
D2 D4204T20 88/3750 120/3750 280/1500-2250 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 16.0:1
D3 D4204T9 110/3750 150/3750 320/1750-3000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 16.0:1
D4 D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1
D4 AWD D5244T21 140/4000 190/4000 440/1500-2750 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
D5 D4204T11 165/4250 225/4250 470/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 420).
Related information
• Coolant - grade and volume (p. 432)
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 430)
428
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 430)
• Engine oil - general (p. 373)
429
SPECIFICATIONS
Volvo recommends:
430
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 429)
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 374)
431
SPECIFICATIONS
432
SPECIFICATIONS
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
M66 approx. 1.45 BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-71SC approx 6.8 AW1
TF-80SD approx 7.0 AW1
approx. 6.6A
TG-81SC AW1
approx. 7.5B
A Petrol engines
B Diesel engines
433
SPECIFICATIONS
434
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
Filling stations may have different tank pres-
sures, so fillable gas volume may differ from
one refuelling to another.
Related information
• Filling up with fuel (p. 310)
• Engine specifications (p. 427)
435
SPECIFICATIONS
436
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Engine Volume Prescribed grade
4-cylinder 60 ml PAG SP-A2
5-cylinder 110 ml PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
437
SPECIFICATIONS
V60
438
SPECIFICATIONS
V60
}}
439
SPECIFICATIONS
||
V60
Fuel consumption and emission values in the • If the car is equipped with extra equipment Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in
table above are based on specific EU driving that affects the car's weight. a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see
cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb • The driver's driving style. below) which are used in the certification of the
weight in the basic version and without extra car and on which the consumption figures in the
equipment. The car's weight may increase • If the customer chooses wheels other than table are based. For further information, please
depending on equipment. This, as well as how those fitted as standard on the model's basic refer to the regulations referred to.
heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consump- version then rolling resistance may increase.
tion and carbon dioxide emissions. • High speed results in increased wind resis- NOTE
tance.
There are several reasons for increased fuel con- Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
sumption compared with the table's values. • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
Examples of this are: weather and the condition of the car.
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
A combination of the above-mentioned examples ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
can result in significantly increased consumption.
440
SPECIFICATIONS
441
SPECIFICATIONS
Wheels and tyres - approved Information on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) For information on the minimum permitted load
dimensions or all-wheel drive (AWD) and the type of trans- index (LI) and the minimum permitted speed rat-
In certain countries not all approved dimensions mission is needed to read the table. For informa- ing (SS), see Load index and speed rating
are indicated by the registration document or tion with respect to these details, see Type des- (p. 444).
ignations (p. 420).
other documents. The following table shows all ✓ = Approved
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
442
SPECIFICATIONS
Related information
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 336)
443
SPECIFICATIONS
Load index and speed rating tion on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all- respect to these details, see Type designations
The table below shows the minimum permitted wheel drive (AWD) and the type of transmission (p. 420).
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Informa- is needed to read the table. For information with
V60 man/
Engine aut Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
T2 B4154T5 aut 93 H
T3 B4154T4 aut 93 H
T3 B4154T6 aut 93 H
T3 B4204T37 man 92 V
man 92 HC
T4 B4204T19
aut 93 HC
T5/Bi-Fuel B4204T11 aut 93 HC
T5 B4204T41 aut 93 HC
T6 B4204T9 aut 93 HC
T6 AWD B4204T9 aut 95 HD
Polestar B4204T43 aut 95 W
D2 D4204T8 man 92 H
D2 D4204T20 aut 93 H
man 92 H
D3E D4204T9
aut 93 H
444
SPECIFICATIONS
V60 man/
Engine aut Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
man 92 HC
D3F D4204T9
aut 93 H
man 92 H
D4E D4204T14
aut 93 H
man 92 HC
D4F D4204T14
aut 93 HC
D4 AWD D5244T21 aut 94 HC
D5 D4204T11 aut 93 HC
A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
C Cars without top-speed inhibitor 210 km/h (130 mph) require the lowest speed rating V.
D Cars without top-speed inhibitor 210 km/h (130 mph) require the lowest speed rating W.
E This only applies to the low-emissions variant.
F Does not apply to the low-emissions variant.
Related information
• Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 442)
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 446)
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
• Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 336)
• Tyres - load index (p. 337)
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 337)
445
SPECIFICATIONS
V60 Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Engine (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
446
SPECIFICATIONS
V60 Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Engine (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
}}
447
SPECIFICATIONS
|| V60 Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Engine (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
19-inch wheels must never be used on cars • Type designations (p. 420)
that are not equipped with the R-Design,
Sport chassis or Polestar options. The use of
19-inch wheels on cars with standard chas-
sis constitutes a safety risk, with a risk of
vehicle damage, and it impairs the car's driv-
ing characteristics.
Related information
• Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions
(p. 442)
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 336)
448
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX
449
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
450
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Collision warning system resume set speed 200 Distance Warning 201
function 230 temporary deactivation 199 Limitations 202
general limitations 235 CTA 242 Symbols and messages 203
operation 233 Door mirrors 106
Cyclist detection 231
Pedestrian detection 232 automatic dimming 107
Radar sensor 217, 223 CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package) 128
resetting 107
Collision Warning System with Auto Driveable punctured tyres 352
Brake 229
Drive mode ECO 298
Colour code, paint 416 D
Driver Alert Control 249
Combined instrument panel 66, 67 Daytime running lights 92 operation 249
Compass 109 Deadlock 183 Driver Alert System 248
calibration 109 deactivation 183
Driving 309
Condensation in headlamps 411 temporary deactivation 183
cooling system 307
Controls lighting 91 Defroster 136 with the tailgate open 308
Control symbols 67, 69 Detachable towbar Driving in water 307
storage 321
Coolant Driving with a trailer 318
volume and grade 432 Diesel 313 towball load 425
run out of fuel 313 towing capacity 425
Coolant, checking and filling 376
Diesel particle filter 314
Cooling system 307
overheating 307 Dimensions 423
Cornering lights 97 Dipstick, electronic 374, 375 E
Corner Traction Control 191 Direction indicator 100 ECC, electronic climate control 132
Crash, see Collision 42 Direction indicators 100 Eco Cruise 298
Cruise control 198 direction of rotation 333 EcoGuide 70
deactivate 200 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 287 Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual 25
managing speed 199 Display lighting 91 ECO mode 298
451
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Electrical socket 153 partment heater exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in 308
cargo area 157 direct start 141 External dimensions 423
immediate stop 142
Electrical system 397
Engine braking, automatic 289
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage 303 Engine compartment F
Brake and clutch fluid 377
Electronic climate control - ECC 132 Fan
Check 372
Emergency equipment coolant 376 ECC 134
first aid kit 345 Engine oil 373 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 225
warning triangle 343 overview 371 First aid 345
Emergency puncture repair 359 power steering fluid 378
First aid kit 345
action 361 Engine drag control 191
inflating the tyres 364 Fluids, capacities 390, 432, 433, 434,
Engine oil 373, 429 435, 436
rechecking 363
adverse driving conditions 429
Emergency puncture repair kit Fluids and oils 432, 433, 434, 436
filter 373
location 359 grade and volume 430 Fog lamp
overview 360 rear 98
Engine oil, filling 374
Emissions of carbon dioxide 438 Foot brake 300, 301, 302
Engine specifications 427
Engine FOUR-C - Active chassis 190
Error messages
deactivate 277 FSC, ecolabelling 25
Adaptive Cruise Control 215
overheating 307
Driver Alert Control 251 Fuel 311, 312, 313
start 276
Lane Departure Warning 255 fuel consumption 438
Start/Stop 290
LKA 260 fuel economy 334, 335
Engine and passenger compartment heater see Messages and symbols 215, 305 fuel filter 314
messages 144 identifier 312, 313
Error messages in BLIS 244
timer 142
ERS - Remote Start 277
452
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
453
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lane assistance
I J operation 254, 258
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System 128 Jack 344 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 252, 253,
Immobiliser 165 Journey statistics 124 254
Indicator symbols 71 Jump starting 281 Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 256, 257
Inflatable curtain 39 Lane keeping assistant
Information button, PCC 167, 168 operation 259
Inlaid mats 153 Kerb weight 424 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 415
454
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
455
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
456
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
457
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Steering force level, see Steering force 190 Symbols and messages Towing bracket 321
Steering lock 277 Adaptive Cruise Control 215 specifications 322
Collision Warning with Auto Towing capacity and towball load 425
Steering wheel 88
Brake 228, 238
heating 89 Towing eye 327
Driver Alert Control 251
keypad 89 TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring 346,
Lane Departure Warning 255
paddle 89 348, 349
LKA 260
steering wheel adjustment 88
Traction control 191
Stone chips and scratches 416
Trailer 318
Storage spaces
glovebox 152
T cable 318, 319
driving with a trailer 318
tunnel console 152 Tailgate snaking 325
Storage spaces in the passenger compart- Locking/unlocking 181
Trailer stability assist 192
ment 150 Temperature
Trailer Stability Assist 325
Sunroof actual temperature 127
Transmission 282
opening and closing 110 Temperature control 135
pinch protection 112 Transmission oil
Through-load hatch 155
sunscreen 112 volume and grade 433
TM - Tyre Monitor 346
ventilation position 111 Transponder 20
Tools 344
Sunscreen, sunroof 112 Tread depth 338
Total airing function 126, 180
Support 15 Tread wear indicators 334
Towbar
Support battery 395 Trip computer 116, 118, 121, 124
detachable, attachment 323
Switching off the engine 277 detachable, removal 324 Trip meter 75, 116
Symbols Towbar, see Towing equipment 321 Trip meter, resetting 119, 122
indicator symbols 67, 69, 71 Troubleshooting
Towbar - detachable
warning symbols 67, 69 Adaptive Cruise Control 214
attachment/removal 323, 324
Towing 326 TSA - trailer stability assist 192, 325
towing eye 327
458
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
459
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Wheels
installation 342
removal 339
snow chains 338
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 442
tyre load index and speed rating 444
Whiplash injury, WHIPS 39
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion 39
seating position 40
whiplash protection 39
Windows, rearview and door mirrors 413
Windscreen
heating 108, 136
Windscreen washing 104
Windscreen wiper 102
rain sensor 103
Winter driving 309
460
TP 22176 (English), AT 1646, MY17, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2016, Copyright © 2000-2016 Volvo Car Corporation